K0376 Vista 128fbp V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

User Manual: vista-128fbp-v1-installation-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 144

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

9,67$)%3
9,67$)%3

&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\
3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP

ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ

,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH

ARMED

READY

OFF

MAX

INSTANT

READY

AWAY

TEST

8
0

CODE

STAY

BYPASS

CHIME

ARMED

READY

OFF

2 AWAY

MAX

7 INSTANT
READY

TEST

8 CODE
0

STAY

6 BYPASS
9 CHIME
#

K0376 8/02 edited by Tech Support

Table of Contents
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

List of Figures...................................................................................................................................vi
Conventions Used in This Manual.............................................................................................. vii
SECTION 1: General Description ............................................................................................... 1-1
About the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP ...................................................................................................1-1
Features ...........................................................................................................................................................1-1

SECTION 2: Partitioning and Panel Linking ........................................................................... 2-1
Theory of Partitioning.....................................................................................................................................2-1
Setting-Up a Partitioned System ...................................................................................................................2-1
Common Lobby Logic ......................................................................................................................................2-1
Master Keypad Setup and Operation ............................................................................................................2-3
Panel Linking ..................................................................................................................................................2-4
How to Use Panel Linking ..............................................................................................................................2-5

SECTION 3: Installing The Control............................................................................................ 3-1
Mounting the Control Cabinet .......................................................................................................................3-1
Installing the Cabinet Lock ............................................................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines.........................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines ...............................................................................3-2
Installing the Control's Circuit Board ...........................................................................................................3-2
Installing the Keypads ....................................................................................................................................3-3
Installing External Sounders .........................................................................................................................3-4
Auxiliary Relay Connections ..........................................................................................................................3-5
Telephone Line Connections...........................................................................................................................3-7
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8..........................................................................................3-8
Installing RPM Devices ................................................................................................................................3-12
Wireless Zone Expansion ..............................................................................................................................3-14
Installing Output Devices.............................................................................................................................3-17
Installing a Remote Keyswitch.....................................................................................................................3-19
Installing a 5140LED Indicator Module ......................................................................................................3-19
Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder ..........................................................................................................3-20
Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module ..................................................................................................3-20
Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP....................................................................................................3-21
Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers ........................................................................................3-23
Installing the Alpha Pager Module ..............................................................................................................3-23
Access Control Using VistaKey ....................................................................................................................3-25
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System .....................................................................3-26
Event Log Connections .................................................................................................................................3-27
Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module ..........................................................................................................3-27
Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module.........................................................................................3-27
Connecting the Transformer ........................................................................................................................3-30
Earth Ground Connections ...........................................................................................................................3-31
Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load...........................................................................................3-31
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery .............................................................................................3-33

iii

Table of Contents

SECTION 4: Programming ........................................................................................................... 4-1
Program Modes................................................................................................................................................4-1
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode ....................................................................................................4-1
Data Field Programming Mode ......................................................................................................................4-1
#93 Menu Mode Programming .......................................................................................................................4-2
Zone Number Designations ............................................................................................................................4-4
Zone Response Type Definitions.....................................................................................................................4-6
Zone Input Type Definitions...........................................................................................................................4-7
Programming for Panel Linking.....................................................................................................................4-8
Programming for the Alpha Pager Module....................................................................................................4-8
Programming for Access Control....................................................................................................................4-9
Programming for ECP Long Range Radio ...................................................................................................4-10
Programming for the Event Log...................................................................................................................4-10

SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions ......................................................................................... 5-1
About Data Field Programming .....................................................................................................................5-1
Programming Data Fields ..............................................................................................................................5-1

SECTION 6: Scheduling Options................................................................................................. 6-1
Time Window Definitions ...............................................................................................................................6-2
Open/Close Schedules Definitions..................................................................................................................6-3
Scheduling Menu Mode...................................................................................................................................6-4
Time Windows .................................................................................................................................................6-5
Daily Open/Close Schedules ...........................................................................................................................6-5
Holiday Schedules ...........................................................................................................................................6-6
Time-Driven Events ........................................................................................................................................6-7
Limitation of Access Schedules ....................................................................................................................6-11
Temporary Schedules....................................................................................................................................6-12
User Scheduling Menu Mode........................................................................................................................6-13

SECTION 7: Downloading Primer .............................................................................................. 7-1
General Information........................................................................................................................................7-1
Unattended Download ....................................................................................................................................7-1
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel...........................................................................................................7-2
Scheduled Download .......................................................................................................................................7-3
Direct-Wire Downloading ...............................................................................................................................7-4
Telco Handoff...................................................................................................................................................7-4

SECTION 8: Setting the Real-Time Clock ................................................................................. 8-1
General Information........................................................................................................................................8-1
Setting the Time and Date .............................................................................................................................8-1

SECTION 9: User Access Codes................................................................................................... 9-1
General Information........................................................................................................................................9-1
User Codes & Levels of Authority ..................................................................................................................9-1
Multiple Partition Access................................................................................................................................9-2
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ..............................................................................................9-3
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code..........................................................................................9-4
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User..........................................................................................................9-4
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ............................................................................................9-5
Exiting the User Edit Mode............................................................................................................................9-5

Table of Contents

SECTION 10: Testing the System.............................................................................................. 10-1
Battery Test ...................................................................................................................................................10-1
Dialer Test .....................................................................................................................................................10-1
Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69) ...................................................................................................................10-1
One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68) .................................................................................................10-1
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)........................................................................................................10-2
Armed Burglary System Test .......................................................................................................................10-1
Testing Wireless Transmitters .....................................................................................................................10-1
Trouble Conditions ........................................................................................................................................10-4
To the Installer ..............................................................................................................................................10-5

APPENDIX A: Regulatory Agency Statements ....................................................................... A-1
UL Installation Requirements....................................................................................................................... A-1
UL864/NFPA Local Fire ................................................................................................................................ A-1
UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire ............................................................................. A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault ............................................. A-1
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm ......................................................................................... A-2
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ........................................................................................ A-2
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements. ............................................................................... A-2

APPENDIX B: Summary of System Commands ...................................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C: Specifications ...................................................................................................... C-1
APPENDIX D: Contact ID and Pager Event Codes ................................................................ D-1
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES ................................................................................................. D-1
Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors....................................................................................................... D-2

Index........................................................................................................................................ Index-1
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

List of Figures
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock...............................................................................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ........................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board.......................................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel ................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply ..............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections............................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation.....................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset.............................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18) ..............................................................3-8
Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control ....................................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply........................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8...........................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision..................................................................3-11
Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision ....................................................................3-11
Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the Control Panel..............................................................................................3-13
Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module .......................................................................3-13
Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules .......................................................................3-14
Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection ........................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed) ..................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module...........................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module......................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module...................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-24: Remote Keyswitch Wiring ...............................................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-25: Wiring the 5140LED Indicator Module ..........................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring.....................................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram .........................................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals............................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module......................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey .........................................................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module ...............................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections ...............................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-35: AAV Connections .............................................................................................................................................3-30
Figure 3-36: Connecting the Backup Batteries ....................................................................................................................3-34
Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections...............................................................................................................7-4
VISTA-128FBP Summary of Connections Diagram.................................................................................. Second to Last Page
VISTA-250FBP Summary of Connections Diagram......................................................................................Inside Back Cover

Conventions Used in This Manual
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following
symbols (icons).

These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for
a UL Listed application.

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the
installation, and that, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or
could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also
denotes warnings about physical harm to the user.

ZONE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

✴00

Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to
alpha keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.

Additional system options are programmed via data fields, which are indicated by a “star” (T)
followed by the data field number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:

Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products.

vii

viii

S E C T I O N

General Description
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

About the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP is an 8-partition, UL Listed commercial fire and burglary control panel with the
following features:
•
Up to 128 zones for VISTA-128FBP; 250 zones for VISTA-250FBP (hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones)
•
Up to 150 user codes for VISTA-128FBP; 250 user codes for VISTA-250FBP
•
Supervision of Notification Appliance Circuits, phone lines, keypads, RF receivers, and output devices
•
Scheduling capabilities (allows certain operations to be automated)
•
The capability to link up to 8 control panels using Panel Linking Modules
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can interface with the following devices:
•
Symphony (AUI)
•
An alpha numeric paging device (VA8201)
•
Panel Link Module (VA8200)
•
An ECP Long Range Radio that can send Contact ID messages
•
An access control system by using either the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the VISTA Gateway Module) or a
VistaKey module (via the polling loop)

The access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Control Panel in a UL
installation.

The system supports either the VistaKey or the VISTA Gateway Module, not both.

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. The following table lists the differences
between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels. All other features are identical.
VISTA-128FBP

VISTA-250FBP

Number of Zones

Feature

128

250

Number of User Codes

150

250

Number of Access Cards

250

500

Event Log Capacity

512

1000

VistaKey Modules

Features
Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones
•
Provides 8 hardwire zones.
•
Supports up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone 1 and zone 2 (32 total).
•
Automatically resets 4-wire smoke detectors using the J2 output when a code + off is entered.
•
Triggers the built-in sounders on other hardwired smoke detectors if one smoke detector annunciates an alarm. This
feature requires a 4204 Relay Module and/or the 333PRM.
•
Provides tamper supervision on the hardwire zones.
•
Supports up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.
•
Supports up to 242 additional expansion zones (120 for the VISTA-128FBP) using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop.
•
Supports up to 250 wireless zones (128 for the VISTA-128FBP) fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones.

1-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial Burglary
applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications.

•

Can program burglary zones as silent in the alarm condition (alarm output is silent and the keypad does not display
or sound the alarm).

•

Provides three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).

Peripherals Devices
Supports up to 31 addressable devices, (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.).
•
Supervises devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay modules) and individual relays (up to 32), as well as system
•
zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).
Provides 96 outputs using 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, Fire System Annunciators (FSA-8, FSA-24), and V-Plex
•
Relay Modules can activate outputs in response to system events (alarm condition), at a specific time of day, at
random times, and manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode.
Supports additional style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits using a 4204CF.
•
Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module, which allows access to the system from either a remote location or
•
on the premises

UL
•
•

The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Control Panel in a UL
installation.

Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's 8 partitions.
Supports the PS24 Power Supply Module, which supplies two 24VFW, 1.7A full-wave rectified, unfiltered outputs.

Arming/Disarming and Bypassing
Can arm the system with zones faulted (Vent Zone). These zones are automatically bypassed and can be
•
programmed to automatically unbypass when the zone restores.
Can arm with entry/exit and interior type zones faulted (Arm w/Fault). These zones must be restored before the exit
•
delay expires, otherwise an alarm is generated.

UL
•
•
•
•

•
•

•

•
•

Vent zones cannot be used in UL installations.
You must disable the Force Arm option (used in conjunction with the Arm w/Fault option), in UL installations.

Provides global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the user code has access to in one command).
Can Quick Exit an armed premises without having to disarm and then rearm the system.
Can be armed in one of three STAY modes or Instant modes, automatically bypassing specific burglary zones
regardless of the zone response type.
Can automatically bypass specific zones if no one exits the premises after arming (Auto-STAY). Auto-STAY will not
occur if the system is armed via an RF transmitter, VIP module, scheduling, access control, keyswitch, or
downloading.
Can bypass a group of zones with one set of keystrokes.
Supports Exit Error Logic, whereby the system can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused
by leaving an entry/exit door open. If the system is not subsequently disarmed, faulted entry/exit zone(s) and/or
interior zones are bypassed and the system arms.
Supports Recent Close report, which is designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 2
minutes after the exit delay has expired.

Partitioning and Panel Linking
Can control 8 separate areas (partitions) independently, each functioning as if it had its own separate control. All
•
fire zones must be assigned to partition 1.
Provides a Common Lobby partition, which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition is
•
armed, and to disarm when the first partition is disarmed.
Provides a Master partition (9), used for the purpose of viewing the status of all partitions at the same time.
•
Can display fire, burglary, panic, and trouble conditions at all other partitions’ keypads (selectable option).
•
Can “link” together up to 8 control panels. This allows users to access and control from a keypad another control
•
panel.

1-2

Section 1 - General Description
Scheduling
•
Can automate system functions, such as arming, disarming, and activation of outputs (e.g., lights).
•
Provides access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).
•
Provides an End User Output Programming Mode, allowing the user to control outputs.
Access Control
•
Supports up to 15 VistaKey modules (15 access points) (VISTA-128FBP supports 8 modules), which are used for
access control. It is a single-door access control module.
•
Support up to 500 access cards (250 for the VISTA-128FBP).
•
Supports ADEMCO PassPoint system via one VISTA Gateway Module (VGM), for a fully integrated access control
system.
•
Can store access control events in the event log.
System Communication
•
Provides supervision of the phone lines (main and backup)
•
Supports the 5140DLM optional backup dialer for the second phone line.
•
Supports ADEMCO Contact ID; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Express; and 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 ADEMCO and
Sescoa/Radionics Low-Speed formats.
The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID communication. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting all
250 zones, as well as openings and closings for all 250 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with the
ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4.10 or higher to fully support all new VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP
report codes. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact your distributor.
•
•
•
•

Can send messages such as alarms, opens/closes, etc. to up to 8 paging services.
Provides two paging formats (alphanumeric – requires the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module; and numeric – sent directly
by the control)
Supports Dynamic Signaling feature, which prevents redundant signals being sent to the central station when both
the built-in dialer and Long Range Radio are used.
Provides an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option that permits voice dialog between an operator at the central
station and a person at the premises. An AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1250, is required.

The Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed.

Downloading
•
Supports upload and download capability.
•
Can perform unattended downloading (no one at the downloading computer).
•
Provides an Installer Unattended Program Mode. This allows the installer to program the download phone number,
subscriber number, and primary central station receiver phone number without entering the normal program mode.
•
Can periodically and automatically perform a scheduled download.

UL
•

Unattended and Scheduled Downloading are not UL Listed features.

Can download access control cardholder information.

Event Log
•
Provides an event log (history log) that can store up to 1000 events (512 for the VISTA-128FBP).
•
Can print the event log on a serial printer or parallel printer using the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module.
•
Can view the event log on an alpha keypad or AUI.

1-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Fire Walk-Test Mode
•
Provides an automatic test of integrated V-Plex devices that have the automatic test feature.
•
Can display all fire zones that remain untested.
•
Can log test results in the event log.
•
Can report the test results to the central station.
Additional Features
•
Provides two style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits.
•
Provides an auxiliary relay (form C) that can activate alarms troubles/supervisories, reset 4-wire smoke detectors, or
as a battery saver (removes power form non-critical loads 4 hours after AC power loss).
•
Provides up to 60 installer-defined, custom words that can be used for zone descriptors.
•
Provides 35 keypad macro commands (each macro is a series of keypad commands of up to 32 keystrokes) using the
A, B, C, and D keys by partition.
•
Provides cross-zone capability, which helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless
its cross-zone is also faulted within a 5-minute period.
•
Contains a built-in User’s Manual, which provides the end user with a brief explanation of the function of a key
when the user presses any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds.
•
Provides trigger outputs, which may interface with Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as keyswitch
LEDs, or printer.
•
Provides an option to have trouble and supervisory conditions to automatically clear from the display when the zone
returns to the ready/normal state (entry of Code + OFF is not required).
•
Provides Maintenance Signal support for certain smoke detectors (5808, 4192CPM, 4192SDM, 4192SDTM, 5192).
At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160) must be connected to the system for programming (if you are using
keypad programming), and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program
additional user codes into the system at a later time.

1-4

S E C T I O N

Partitioning and Panel Linking
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Theory of Partitioning
This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its own control. These areas
are called partitions. A Partitioned system allows the user to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed, or
to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions,
and can be given a different authority level in each.
Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many partitions (1-8) are required.
Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.

Keypads
Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition. It can also be assigned to Partition 9 if
Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup and Operation” later in this section.)

Zones
Each zone must be assigned to one partition. The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's
keypad(s).

All fire zones must be assigned to partition 1to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

Users
Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like
to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for
those partitions (when entering user codes).
A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition from another partition's
keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he/she wants to log on to from
another.
A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this partition by causing
arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby Logic” later in this section).

Setting-Up a Partitioned System
The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more information on how to program
the options, see SECTION 4: Programming.
1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).
2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.
5. Assign users to partitions.
6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user can log on to (alpha keypad
only).
7. Program partition-specific fields (see the SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions).

Common Lobby Logic
When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building, that shared partition may
be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a
medical building where there are two doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows
explanation).
The Common Lobby feature employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two programming
fields determine the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects
Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.

2-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
1*18
Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby is automatically disarmed.
b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
1*19
Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
b. Arming a partition that is programmed to arm the lobby causes the system to automatically attempt to arm the
lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or if another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby
cannot be armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.

You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the lobby. Do not enable
field 1*19 without enabling field 1*18.

The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate.
1*18
Affects Lobby

1*19
Arms Lobby

Disarms when
partition disarms?

Attempts to arm
when partition
arms?

Can be armed if
other partitions
disarmed?

YES

---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

Example
Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.

OFFICE 1

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.
User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.
Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.
Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.

OFFICE 2

NOTE: In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( )
indicate the current status of the other partition when the user
takes action.

COMMON LOBBY

MAIN ENTRANCE

V128BP-001-V0

Sequence #1:
Office 1

2-2

Office 2

Lobby Action

User #1:

Disarms

(Armed)

Disarms

User #2:

(Disarmed)

Disarms

No Change

User #1:

Arms

(Disarmed)

No change

User #2:

(Armed)

Arms

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
Sequence #2:
Office 1

Office 2

Lobby Action

User #2:

(Armed)

Disarms

User #1:

Disarms

(Disarmed)

(No change)

User #2:

(Disarmed)

Arms

No Change

User #1:

Arms

(Armed)

No Change

Notice that in sequence #1, because Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office #2 is programmed to
affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which
affects the lobby, was still disarmed.
When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to arm the lobby. User #1
would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if
the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building.
Do not assign partition 1 as the common lobby if fire zones are being used in the system. All fire zones must be
assigned to partition 1 to ensure all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby
Codes with Global Arming
If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the SECTION 9: User Access Codes), the keypad prompts the
user to select the partitions they want to arm. Only the partitions the user has access to are displayed. This allows the
user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in
mind, however, that if a user attempts to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user cannot arm the
lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.
Codes with Non-Global Arming
If a user arms with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation is automatic, as described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming
Common Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby in
one of the following manners:
•
Quick-Arm
•
Keyswitch
•
Wireless Button
•
Wireless Keypad
Arming/Disarming Remotely
If a user arms or disarms remotely (through Compass downloading software), the lobby does not automatically follow
another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all
affecting partitions first.
Auto-Arming/Disarming
If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby partition does not automatically
follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby partition must be scheduled to
arm/disarm and must be scheduled as the last partition to arm.
If you are using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods, for the lobby
partition, (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This
causes the lobby to arm last.

Master Keypad Setup and Operation
Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning
keypads as Master keypads for the system.
Assigning any keypad to Partition 9 in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode makes that keypad a Master keypad.
A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful
because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to have to log on to various partitions from one partition's
keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred.

2-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
The following is a typical display:
SYSTEM 12345678
STATUS RRNNA ✴B
Possible status indications include:
A = Armed Away
S = Armed Stay
I = Armed Instant
R = Ready
✴ = Alarm
B = Bypassed/Ready
F = Fire Alarm
P = AC Power Failure

M = Armed Maximum
N = Not Ready

C = Comm Fail

T = Trouble
L = Low System Battery

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter [✴] + Partition No. (e.g., [✴] + [4]). This allows
viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that
partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user
must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access is denied.
The following is displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when a
user logs on from a keypad on Partition 9:
WHSE DISARMED
HIT ✴ FOR FAULTS
Pressing [✴] causes the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):
FAULT 002 LOADING
DOCK WINDOW
Additional zone faults are displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status, press [✴] + Partition No.
The Armed LED on a Master keypad is lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully. The Ready LED is lit only
if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither LED is lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are
ready.
Press [✴] + [0] or [✴] + [9] to return to the master partition. Otherwise, if no keys are pressed for 2 minutes, the system
automatically returns to the master partition
The sounder on a Master keypad reflects the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions. The priority of
the sounds, from most to least critical, is as follows:
1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds
2. Steady burglar alarm sounds
3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)
Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists.

A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1, and will activate
on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.

Panel Linking
Up to eight VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control panels may be networked, enabling a user to control the features of
all control panels from a single location. The panel linking bus supports an end-to-end network length of up to 4,000 feet,
making it ideal for multi-building environments (e.g., a shopping mall, college campus, etc.).

Panel Linking is not permitted in UL installations.

Panel linking requires a VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) on each VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP. Users can link
(access other control panels) in any of three different modes: Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode, Multi-Partition, MultiPanel Mode, Multi-Panel View Mode. These modes are described later in this section.
Each PLM connects to the ECP bus on the control panel and communicates to each PLM via an RS-485 bus (3-wire
twisted cable run) with a maximum wire-run of 4000 feet end-to-end.

2-4

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
•
•
•

Users 001-050 are the only users that can perform panel linking and are automatically assigned panel
linking access when added to the system.
An alpha keypad must be used for panel linking.
The system may take up to 7 seconds to respond to a command when in a panel linking mode

NOTE: A user cannot access partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.
Panel Link Module Supervision
The Panel Link Module can be supervised for its connection to the control panel. This module’s supervisory zone is 8xx,
where “xx” = the ECP address of the PLM. You must program that zone with response type 05 (Day/Night) in Zone
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode (refer to the Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). If you
want to report the supervisory failure to the central station and/or to a paging service, the appropriate reporting
parameters for that zone must be programmed.
If you want the supervisory failure of other PLM(s) on other linked control panels to display on this control panel, they
must be programmed into Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode with response type 14 in this control panel (refer to
the Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). The panel ID number for each module must match the
panel ID number programmed in Device Programming of its “host” VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP.

How to Use Panel Linking
Panel Linking can be used in any of three different modes:
•
Single-Partition, Single-Panel − displays status of a partition on a remote control panel and allows control of that
remote control panel.
•
Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode − displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple partitions at once on a
remote control panel.
•
Multi-Panel View Mode − displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple remote control panels at a time.
NOTE: A user will not be able to access or view partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.
Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode
To access the Single-Partition, Single Panel mode, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Enter User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [86].

Enter the panel ID number (01-08) of the panel you want to link to.

Enter the partition number of the panel. The keypad displays “AWAITING PANEL LINK.” After a few
seconds, the keypad displays the status of the partition along with the panel ID number and partition
number flashing in the upper right-hand corner. The user now has full control of the remote control panel.
All functions can be performed except the following:
•
Those limited by the user’s authority level.
•
The user cannot enter Installer Program mode
•
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode.
NOTE: To execute another panel linking mode or to access a different remote panel, the user must first exit
this mode (return to the original control panel).

To exit, enter the User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [85]. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the
status of the original partition for the keypad.

2-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode
To perform a function in the Multi-Partition, Multi Panel mode, follow the steps below:
Step

Action

Enter User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [88].
The keypad displays the following:
PANELnn
STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
x x x x x x x x

where “nn” = panel ID number (01-08), “12345678” are the partition numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the status of
each partition of that panel. Status indications include:
A = Armed Away
S = Armed Stay
M = Armed Maximum
I = Armed Instant
R = Ready
N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready
T = Trouble
✴ = Alarm
F = Fire Alarm
P = AC Power Failure
L = Low System Battery
C = Comm Fail
NOTES: See table later in this section for priority of displays.
A “•” under a partition number indicates the user does NOT have access to that partition.
2

The following functions can be performed:
Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions.
Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions.
Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions.
Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.
Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.
Press [✴] to read the status of the next panel.
Press [#] key to read the status of the previous panel.
Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the
original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.
NOTES:
When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions, none of the
partitions will arm. These faults must be corrected or bypassed before attempting to arm.
When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command, the system always arms in mode 1 (see the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP User Guide for a detailed explanation of the STAY and INSTANT arming
modes).
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. To execute another panel linking mode or to access a
different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original control panel).

2-6

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
Multi-Panel View Mode
To perform a function in the Multi-Panel View mode, follow the steps below:
Step

Action

Enter User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [87].
The keypad displays the following typical display:
ALLPANEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS
x x x x x x x x
where “12345678” are the panel ID numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the overall status of each panel. Status
indications include:
A = Armed Away
S = Armed Stay
M = Armed Maximum
I = Armed Instant
R = Ready
N = Not Ready
✴ = Alarm
B = Bypassed/Ready
T = Trouble
F = Fire Alarm
P = AC Power Failure
L = Low System Battery
C = Comm Fail
NOTE: See table later in this section for priority of displays.

The following functions can be performed::
Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions on all panels.
Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions on all panels.
Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions on all panels.
Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.
Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.
Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the
original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.
NOTES:
When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions of a panel, the
system will not arm that panel, but will arm all the other partitions of the other panels.
When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command the system always arms in mode 1.
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. In order to perform another panel linking mode or to
access a different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original control panel).

Priority of Displays for Multi-Partition and Multi-Panel Modes
This table shows the priority of displays if more than one of these conditions exists at the same time.
Priority

Display

Priority

Fire Alarm

Not Ready

All Other Alarms

✴

Ready

AC Loss

Armed STAY

Comm Fail

Armed AWAY

System Low Battery

Armed INSTANT

Trouble

Armed MAXIMUM

Bypass

Description

Display

2-7

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

2-8

S E C T I O N

Installing The Control
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This section describes the procedures for mounting and wiring the control panel and all the peripheral devices.
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Mounting the Control Cabinet
To mount the control cabinet, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.

Using fasteners or anchors (not supplied), mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall in a clean, dry area
that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

To provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and Figure 3-2
Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations to follow.

Installing the Cabinet Lock
To install the lock, perform the following steps:
Remove cabinet door, then remove the lock
knockout from the door. Insert the key into the
lock.

LOCKED

SNAP
TAB

PUSH

Position the lock in the hole, making certain
that the latch will make contact with the latch
bracket when the door is closed.

UNLOCKED

When correctly positioned, push the lock until
it is held securely by its snap tabs.

CABINET DOOR
BOTTOM

SNAP
TAB

STEP 1

STEP 2

cab_lock_snap-001-V0

CHECK
POSITION

ADEMCO

Action

ADEMCO

Step

PUSH
ON LOCK
UNTIL IT
IS SEATED
SECURELY

Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock

Use an Ademco No. K4445 Lock (supplied).

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines
•

•

The panel door must be supervised. Mount the
clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet's
right side wall as shown in the diagram below, and
wire it to zone 6.
Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as
the ADEMCO AB12. The bell housing's tamper
switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired
to zone 6.
Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it
for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only
one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one
burglary partition is used.

•

All wiring between the bell and panel must be run
in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to be run
in conduit.
All wiring that is not run in conduit must exit from
the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the
cabinet.
All unused knockouts must be plugged using the
disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied), as
indicated in the diagram below.
Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox
using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws
(supplied) after all wiring, programming, and
checkout procedures have been completed.

3-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)
RUN BELL WIRES
IN CONDUIT

PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
CLIP-ON DOOR
TAMPER SWITCH

PC
BOARD
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT

CABINET
MOUNTING
HOLE
(4 PLACES)
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING,
REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF
DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN.
DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC
PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE
KNOCKOUT OPENING)

KNOCKOUT
OPENING

CARRIAGE BOLT
HEX NUT AND
WASHER

CABINET SIDE WALL
(OUTSIDE)

RUN ALL REMAINING
WIRE THROUGH HERE

cabattack-001-V0

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines
•

Follow the guidelines given above for Grade A
Mercantile Premises listing.
Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to
the control's backbox. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for proper sensor mounting. This
sensor also must be wired to zone 6.

•

For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed
contact must be used inside the cabinet through
one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes.
This sensor also must be wired to zone 6.

Installing the Control's Circuit Board
To install the circuit board in the cabinet, perform the
following steps:
Step

Action

Hang the three mounting clips on the raised
cabinet tabs. Refer to Figure 3-3 (Detail B).
Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as
shown in the diagram to avoid damage. This
will also avoid problems with insertion and
removal of the PC board.

Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots
at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that the
board rests in the slots as indicated (Detail A).

Swing the base of the board into the mounting
clips and secure the board to the cabinet with
the accompanying screws.

Notes:
•

•

Make certain that the mounting screws are tight.
This ensures that there is a good ground connection
between the PC board and the cabinet.
Dress field wiring away from the microprocessor
(center) section of the PC board. Use the loops on
the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for
anchoring field wiring using tie wraps (Detail C).
These steps are important to minimize the risk of
panel RF interference with television reception.

DETAIL A
SIDE VIEW OF
BOARD INSERTED
INTO SLOTS
DETAIL C
SIDE VIEW
OF SLOTS
+
+
+

DETAIL B
SIDE VIEW OF SHORT
MOUNTING CLIPS
(TYP.)
hi_end_mnt-PCB

Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board

3-2

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Installing the Keypads
•

Up to 31 addressable keypads (addresses 00-30)
may be used (you may need to use an auxiliary
power supply if the 1A aux. output is exceeded).
•
Use a 2-line alpha display, 6139/6160 (gray or red)
(check with local AHJ for approval of keypad color).
To wire the keypads, perform the following steps:
Action

Determine wire gauge by referring to the
Wire Run Length/Gauge table below.

Set each keypad for an individual address (00-30)
according to the keypad's instructions. Set an alpha
keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher
addresses (00 and 01 are enabled in the system's
default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and
above will appear blank until they are enabled in the
system's program. Each keypad must be set for a
different address.

Wire Run Length/Gauge Table
Wire Gauge
Length
#22 gauge
450 feet
#20 gauge
700 feet
#18 gauge
1100 feet
#16 gauge
1750 feet

Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect
individual keypads to separate wire runs.
The maximum wire run length from the
control to a keypad, which is homerun back
to the control, must not exceed the lengths
listed in the table.

Run field wiring from the control to the
keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable
of the wire gauge determined in step 1).
Connect keypad(s) to terminals 11, 12, 13,
and 14 on the control board, see Figure 3-4.
NOTE: If using only one keypad, it may be
connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2, and
must be mounted on, or within three feet of
the cabinet. The keypad on Port 2 is
electrically isolated from those on Port 1 and
will continue to function even if wiring
problems prevent the other keypads from
working properly.

–

BLACK
GREEN
YELLOW

KEYPADS

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

RED
TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

CONTROL
TERMINALS

AUX. AUX. DATA DATA
+
– IN OUT

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

SUPPLEMENTARY
POWER SUPPLY

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

• Make connections directly to the screw
terminals as shown in Figure 3-5. Make no
connection to the keypad blue wire (if
present).
• Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal
on the power supply unit to terminal 7 (–) on
the control.

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads
When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices
exceeds 1A, you can power additional keypads from a
regulated 12VDC power supply (e.g., ADEMCO
AD12612 (1.2A)). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed
supply for UL installations.
Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 3-5,
using the keypad wire colors shown. Be sure to observe
the current ratings for the power supply used.

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

•

The length of all wire runs combined,
regardless of the wire gauge, must not
exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad
conductor cable is used (1000 feet if
unshielded cable is run in conduit, which
acts a shield, or if shielded cable is used).
If more than one keypad is wired to one run,
then the above maximum lengths must be
divided by the number of keypads on the run
(e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two
keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

• Do not set any keypads to address 31
(nonaddressable mode). They will interfere
with other keypads (as well as other devices)
connected to the keypad terminals.
• If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is
present on a keypad, data from the control is
not reaching the keypad. Please check your
wiring.

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

•

kypd_conn-001-V0

The keypads will not operate until they are
physically addressed and enabled in the
system's Device Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.

IMPORTANT:
MAKE CONNECTIONS
DIRECTLY TO SCREW
TERMINALS AS SHOWN.
MAKE NO CONNECTION
TO THE KEYPAD BLUE
WIRE (IF PRESENT).
pwr_sup-002-V0

Step

Addressing the Keypads

Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply

Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel

3-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Installing External Sounders
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides two
Notification Appliance Circuits for operating fire and
burglary alarm notification appliances. Each circuit is
rated as follows: 10VDC – 14VDC, 1.7A max., powerlimited. NOTE: The total alarm current drawn from
Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, polling loop, Bell
1, and Bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3 amps for batteryindependent operation.
The outputs has the following options:
•
Selectable for supervision.
•
Selectable to activate by individual zone
assignments
•
Selectable for confirmation of arming ding.
•
Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter
zones are faulted.
•
Selectable for steady or pulsing
•
Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30
minutes.
If you purchased a kit containing the PS24
Power Supply Module, you may use this
module to convert one or both VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP 12VDC, 1.7A style-Y
supervised Notification Appliance Circuits to
24VFW, 1.7A style-Y supervised Notification
Appliance Circuits.

•
•

Burglary Notification Appliance Circuits
must be programmed for a timeout of 16
minutes or longer.
Commercial fire alarm systems require
Notification Appliance Circuits to be
supervised.

This control complies with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) requirements for
temporal pulse sounding of fire notification
appliances.

Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision
When supervision is enabled, the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP monitors the Notification
Appliance Circuits wiring for open and short circuit
faults while the output is inactive. The system provides
a trouble indication (Zone 970 Bell 1; 971 Bell 2) when
an open occurs; or when a short occurs between the Bell
(+) and Bell (-) terminal wiring, or between the Bell (+)
terminal wiring and earth ground.
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP indicates the
trouble condition regardless of whether the system is
armed or disarmed. The zone displays on the keypads,
reports to the event log, and transmits to the central
station (if programmed) on Partition 1. The trouble is
cleared from the display by entering the user code +
OFF.

3-4

Wiring the Alarm Output
The wiring of the Notification Appliance Circuits
depends upon whether you are going to supervise the
circuit or not. Use the appropriate procedure below for
your application.

Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL
installations.

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices
Model
ADEMCO AB12
System Sensor PA400B
(beige/PA400R (red)
System Sensor MA-12/24
System Sensor SS1215 ADA
System Sensor SS121575 ADA
System Sensor MASS1215 ADA
System Sensor MASS121575 ADA
System Sensor MA/SS-12
Wheelock LS1-12-VFR
Wheelock MS1-12-VFR
Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR
Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR
Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR
WheelockMT4-12-MS-VFR
Gentex GXS-2-15
Gentex GXS-2-1575
Gentex SHG-12-15
Gentex SHG-12-1575
Faraday 5336L-U-14-12-DC
Faraday 5337-L-U-14-12-DC

Device Type
Grade A Bell
Indoor piezo sounder
rated at 90dB @ 10 feet.
Horn
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Strobe
Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe
Horn/Strobe

Section 3 - Installing the Control
BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS
BELL 1 IS CONFIGURED AS A BURGLARY BELL CIRCUIT
USE NONPOLARIZED GRADE A INDICATING DEVICES
(e.g., ADEMCO NO AB12 - SEE WIRING NOTES BELOW)
WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED; CUT WHITE JUMPER, W1,
ON MAIN PCB.
ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 3-8 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,
ZONES 3-8 ARE ASSIGNED TO BURGLARY PARTITION 1)
STEADY ALARM OUTPUT
16-MINUTE TIMEOUT.
BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS
BELL 2 IS CONFIGURED AS A FIRE BELL CIRCUIT
USE POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.
CLASS B OPEN/SHORT SUPERVISION.
24-HR TROUBLE RESPONSE TO FAULTS.
ACTIVATES FOR ZONE 1-2 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,
ZONES 1-2 ARE ASSIGNED TO FIRE PARTITION 1)
PULSED ALARM OUTPUT.
NO TIMEOUT

AB12 BELL/BOX WIRING

+
BELL 1

+
BELL 2

2k EOLR
(MODEL 610-7)

TO PANEL'S EARTH
GROUND (TB30)

TO ZONE 6 - (TB23)

TO ZONE 6 - (TB24)

TO PANEL'S BELL –
(e.g., BELL 1; TB4)

TO PANEL'S BELL +
(e.g., BELL 1; TB3)

AB12 WIRING NOTES:
DISCONNECT THE AB12'S FACTORY-WIRED CONNECTION
FROM ITS TERMINAL #4 TO ITS OUTER BOX.
SET FIELD 3* 17 TO "1" TO ENABLE ZONE 6 TAMPER FUNCTION.
ASSIGN ZONE 6 TO A BURGLARY PARTITION. PROGRAM
IT FOR DAY TROUBLE/NIGHT ALARM RESPONSE (TYPE 05)
WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY ONLY ONE BURGLARY
PARTITION. PROGRAM IT FOR 24-HR. AUDIBLE ALARM
RESPONSE (TYPE 07) WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY
MORE THAN ONE BURGLARY PARTITION.
ALL WIRING FROM AB12 TO PANEL MUST BE RUN IN
CONDUIT.

2k EOLR
1

6
AB12 OUTER BOX
INNER LINER

belloutput-003-V0

TAMPER
SWITCHES
BELL

Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections
Supervising the Notification Appliance Circuits
To wire the NAC using the supervision feature, perform
the following steps:
Step
1

Action
Install a 2K EOL resistor (Model 610-7,
supplied) across the last notification
appliance on each Notification Appliance
Circuit to be supervised.
Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell
2) with a response type of 19 (24-Hour
Trouble).

Disabling the Supervision of the Notification
Appliance Circuits
To install the NAC and disable the supervision feature,
perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Cut the white jumpers W1 (for Bell 1) and W2
(for Bell 2) on the main PC board.

Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell
2) with a response type of 00.
The Notification Appliance Circuits will not
respond unless the zones are assigned to them.
For fire alarms, the system displays “FIRE ALARM
SILENCED.” This message also displays if the
Notification Appliance Circuit is not supervised.

Auxiliary Relay Connections
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides a built-in
Form C relay with contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC, 2.8A.
The relay may be programmed (field 3✳61) for one of
the following functions:
•
Alarm Activation
•
Trouble/Supervisory Activation
•
4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset
•
Battery Saver

Alarm Activation
(3✳61 = 1 or 4) Steady activation in response to an
alarm.
If field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay remains active
until Aux. Relay Timeout expires or until User Code +
OFF is entered. This option can be used to provide an
unsupervised Notification Appliance Circuit for
supplementary strobes, sounders, etc. when wired to
the Aux Power 1 or a separate power supply, see Figure
3-7.

3-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
If field 3✳61 = 4, the auxiliary relay remains activated
until User Code + # + 67 is entered. This option can be
used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire
alarms. By default, the relay is set to activate on alarm
zones 1-8 with no timeout (field 3✳61 = 1).

When field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay can be
programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation
of arming ding (field 3✳57) or Chime Mode (field 3✳59).

ALARM

12
GROUND

AUX PWR #1

N.C.

N.O.

NOTES:
USE NON-POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.
WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED.
DO NOT EXCEED RATINGS OF THE SUPPLY USED.
IF AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT IS USED, THE COMBINED
ALARM CURRENT DRAIN FROM AUX. PWR. 2,
BELL 1, AND BELL 2 CANNOT EXCEED 2.3A MAX.

9
POLE

AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS
ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 1-8 ALARMS
(STEADY ALARM OUTPUT).
NO TIMEOUT.

belloutput-005-V0

CAN DRAW POWER FROM
AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT OR
FROM SEPARATE SUPPLY.

Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation
Battery Saver

Trouble/Supervisory Activation
(3✳61 = 0) Steady activation in response to any zone or
system related trouble condition or to any fire
supervisory condition. The auxiliary relay remains
activated until all fault conditions have been corrected
and a User Code + OFF is entered.

(3✳61 = 3) When this option is selected, the auxiliary
relay is normally activated (e.g., N.O. and pole contacts
are connected) and de-activates 4 hours after the start
of AC Loss. Using this feature, non-critical loads, such
as supplementary keypads, can be disconnected from
the auxiliary power outputs, allowing a smaller
capacity battery to be used. The relay re-activates
within a few seconds after the AC power restores.

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset
(3✳61 = 2) Momentary (6-second) activation in response
to a second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence
following a fire alarm condition. This interrupts power
to 4-wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones
1-8 and polling loop zones, allowing the detectors to be
reset. Power to the detectors should be wired to the
auxiliary relay and to Aux. Power 1 output, see Figure
3-8.
N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

AUXILIARY RELAY

11
Keypad Prt 1 12

BLK

4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS

–

•

+
EOL
POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY
MODULE
A77-716B

CONTROL
PANEL

ZONE
TERMINALS
(15-27)

+
HEAT
DETECTOR

2000
OHM
EOLR

Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset

3-6

4_wiresmk-005-V0

SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Telephone Line Connections
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides one main
built-in dialer for communication to the central station
and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer, both
supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines.
Do not connect the system to telephone lines
that require ground start service.

Telephone Line Supervision
If the tip/ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts
(13 volts if the blue jumper is cut) or the handset
current is less than approximately 10mA, the
supervision circuits for the dialer output will indicate a
fault condition. Faults on the phone lines are displayed
as zones 97 (main dialer) and 975 (backup dialer).
•

For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72)
applications, use either a Long Range Radio
(LRR) alone, the main dialer with the LRR, or
use the main dialer with the 5140DLM.
For listed fire remote station (UL864/NFPA 72)
applications, use the main dialer with the
5140DLM.
Telephone line supervision is required for UL
commercial fire alarm systems when dual line
dialer is used for fire signal transmission.

Main Dialer Connections
To connect the main dialer, refer to the Summary of
Connections diagram and perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Connect the main dialer to the telephone
company lines using the RJ31X cable
supplied.

If the dialer output is connected to telephone
lines that have a telephone company MTU
installed, cut the blue jumper (W6).

Installing the 5140DLM Backup Dialer
Do not connect the main dialer and the backup
dialer to the same telephone company line.
To install the 5140DLM, refer to the Summary of
Connections diagram and perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the 5140DLM to the main PC board
shield.

Connect the backup dialer to the telephone
company lines using the RJ31X cable
supplied.

Connect the backup dialer to the J3 connector
on the main PC board using the ribbon cable
(supplied with the module).

Connect the earth ground screw on the
5140DLM to the earth ground terminal (30)
on the main PC board using 16AWG wire.

If the dialer output is connected to telephone
lines that have a telephone company MTU
installed, cut the blue jumper on the
5140DLM PC board.

•

To prevent risk of shock, disconnect the
phone lines at the telco jack before servicing
the panel.
If the communicator is connected to a
telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the
PABX has backup power supply that can
support the PABX for 24 hours (central
station usage) or 60 hours (remote station
usage). Many PABXs are not power-backed
up, and connection to such a PABX results
in a communication failure if power is lost.
The telephone line inputs have overvoltage
protection in accordance with UL1459, as
specified in UL985/UL1023.

Reporting Formats
The system is shipped defaulted for Contact
ID format. It is the only format capable of
uniquely reporting all 250 zones, as well as
openings and closings for all 250 users. This
requires central stations to be equipped with
the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software
level 4.10 or higher. If you need to update
your 685 Receiver, contact your distributor.
The system supports ADEMCO Low Speed 3+1; 4+1;
4+2; Sescoa/Radionics 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; ADEMCO 4+2
Express; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Contact
ID.formats
Dialer Operation
When only the main dialer is enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,0),
the system attempts to route all messages over the
main dialer output. When both the main and backup
dialers are enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,1), the system
attempts to route all calls over the main dialer output
until a fault condition is detected on the main dialer, at
which time it attempts to use the backup dialer.
The communicator makes up to 8 attempts to transmit
the messages to one or both telephone numbers
(primary and secondary), depending on the report
routing options programmed. After the 8th attempt, the
communicator hangs up and the system displays
“COMM FAIL” on the keypad. The number of dialer
attempts are programmed in field 3✳21 (default = 8;
must be restricted to 3, 4, or 5 if a secondary phone
number is programmed).
The system does not switch to the backup
dialer unless a fault condition is detected on
the main dialer. The backup dialer will not be
activated because of a programming error.

3-7

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8
The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for
zones 1, 2 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other
zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor).
To wire burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8, connect
sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (15
through 27). Connect N.C. and N.O. devices as follows:
•
Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+)
side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be
connected in series with the devices, following the
last device.
•
Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the
loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected
across the loop wires at the last device.

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2
2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones
and must be connected across the loop wires
of each zone at the last detector.
To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1 and/or zone 2,
perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Select 2-wire smoke detectors from the list of
compatible detectors.

Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1
(terminals 15 and 16), and/or zone 2
(terminals 17 and 18) as shown in Figure 3-9.
Observe proper polarity when connecting the
detectors.

Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector
in the loop across the zone 1 terminals. The
EOL resistor must be connected across
the loop wires at the last detector.

Using 2-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1 and 2
Zone 1 and 2 can support up to 16 2-wire smoke
detectors each (32 total).
The alarm current on zones 1 and 2 supports
only one smoke detector in the alarmed state.
When assigned zone type 9 or 16, the second entry of a
User Code + off at a keypad interrupts power to these
zones to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm.

3-8

These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use
with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and
are the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may
be used.

16
2_wiresmk-001-V0

System Sensor 2400
System Sensor 2400TH
System Sensor 2451
System Sensor 2451TH
System Sensor 1400
System Sensor 1451
System Sensor 2451
System Sensor 2451
System Sensor 1451DH
System Sensor 1100
System Sensor 1151
System Sensor 2100
System Sensor 2100T
System Sensor 2151

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR

ZONE 1

DEVICE MODEL #

Photoelectric, direct-wire
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire
Photoelectric w/B401B base
Photoelectric w/heat sensor & B401B
Ionization, direct-wire
Ionization w/B401B base
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base)
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base)
Ionization duct detector (DH400 base)
Ionization, direct-wire
Ionization w/B110LP base
Photoelectric, direct-wire
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire
Photoelectric w/B110LP base

15
SMOKE

DETECTOR TYPE

2000 OHMS
EOLR

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for
zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18)
Using 4-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1-8
You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be
powered from the panel's Auxiliary Power output
without exceeding the output's rating (1A).
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is
not automatically reset after an alarm, and
therefore must be momentarily interrupted
using either the J2 smoke detector reset output
trigger, the auxiliary relay or a 4204 Relay
Module.
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated
for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm reset time
not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire
smoke detectors are listed below.
Detector Type
Photoelectric, direct wire

Detector Model #
System Sensor 2412

Photoelectric w/heat
sensor, direct wire

System Sensor 2412TH

Ionization, direct wire

System Sensor 1412

Section 3 - Installing the Control
Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8, perform
the following steps:

Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be
supervised with an EOL device (use a System
Sensor A77-716B EOL relay module connected
as shown in Figure 3-10).

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

Step

Action

Select 4-wire smoke detectors (see list of
compatible detectors shown previously in
this section).

Connect detectors (including heat detectors,
if used) across terminals of the zone
selected. All detectors must be wired in
parallel. See Figure 3-10.
NOTE: If you are using the J2 output
trigger to reset the smoke detectors, refer to
Smoke Detector Reset later in this section for
the wiring instructions. If you are using the
auxiliary relay to reset the smoke detectors,
refer to Installing the Auxiliary Relay
previously in this section for wiring
instructions.

Connect the EOLR at the last detector in the
loop across the zone’s terminals. You must
connect the EOLR across the loop wires
at the last detector.

AUXILIARY RELAY

11
Keypad Prt 1 12

BLK

–

•

4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS

•

+
EOL
POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY
MODULE
A77-716B

CONTROL
PANEL

ZONE
TERMINALS
(15-27)

2000
OHM
EOLR

HEAT
DETECTOR

4_wiresmk-005-V0

SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST

Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Using Smoke Power Reversal Module
The 333 PRM Polarity Reversing Module is used to
reverse the polarity of the positive and negative
voltages powering smoke detectors. The module is for
use with 4-wire smoke detectors that employ a sounder
and voltage-reversing feature. The module is triggered
by a pulsing Notification Appliance Circuit.
Smoke Detectors Compatible with the 333PRM
The 333PRM may be used with the System Sensor
2112/24AT and similar models with the required
operating features previously stated.

The 333PRM reverses polarity to smoke
detectors with Integral Temp-3 Sounders.
Typically, in alarm, each draws 49-60mA of
current. The control panel supplies only enough
current for one smoke detector. In order to
attach more than one, an external power
supply and an external relay may be required.
Installing the 333 PRM
Mount the 333 PRM inside the control panel’s cabinet
or in a separate cabinet using the double-sided tape
provided. Wire the 333PRM as shown in Figure 3-11 or
Figure 3-12. Refer to the 333PRM Installation
Instructions for detailed information on the installation
of the module.

3-9

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
CONTROL PANEL
12

333 PRM

8
7
6

EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-761B

3
P1

–

4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS

SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST

-2
+1

2000
OHM
EOLR

JUMPER
HEAT
DETECTOR
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN
"B" POSITION

FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT

TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS

333PRM-004-V0

Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control
CONTROL PANEL
9

333 PRM

8
7
6
5
+

3
P1

–

4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS

EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-761B

+
-

-2
+1

JUMPER
HEAT
DETECTOR
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN
"B" POSITION

SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
2000
OHM
EOLR

TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS

FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT

+
333PRM-005-V0

POWER
SUPPLY

USE A 12VDC,
BATTERY-BACKED,
UL LISTED POWER
SUPPLY.

Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply
Zone 6 Tamper Configuration
Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Cabinet Door Tamper Switch
and for the ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Burglary Bell Box
Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner. The bell Housing’s
tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be
wired to zone 6.
Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for
day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one
burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr.
audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one
burglary partition is used. Enable the Zone 6 Alternate
Tamper Function (program field 3✳17.

3-10

When set in this manner, and the zone senses an open
or short, or an earth ground fault occurs by drilling
through the AB12 housing, the system triggers a
trouble when the system is disarmed and an alarm
when it is armed. (See the Installing the External
Sounders for wiring the ADEMCO AB12.)

Section 3 - Installing the Control
Using 2-Wire Latching Glassbreaks on Zone 8
•

Zone 8 can support 2-wire glassbreak detectors. The
zone provides enough standby current to power up to 50
2-wire glassbreak detectors meeting the requirements
listed below.

•

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors
Use detectors that meet the following ratings:
Standby Voltage:

5VDC–13.8VDC

Standby Resistance:

Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent
resistance of all detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance:

Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current:

2mA–10mA

Reset Time:

Less than 6 seconds

To wire 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors to zone 8,
perform the following steps:

NOTES:
•
You can use detectors that exceed 1.1k ohms in
alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of
less than 3.8 volts in alarm.
•
The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and
found to be compatible with these ratings.

2000
OHMS
EOLR

ZONE 8

(+)

(-)

Step

Action

Select compatible 2-wire glassbreak
detectors that meet the requirements stated
previously.

Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals
27 and 28). See Figure 3-13.

Connect the EOL resistor at the last
detector in the loop across the zone’s
terminals. You must connect the EOL
resistor across the loop wires at the last
detector.

LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
glass_conn-001-V0

GLASSBREAK
DETECTOR

The alarm current provided by zone 8
supports only one glassbreak detector in
the alarmed state.
Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts
when using glassbreak detectors on zone
8. Other contacts may prevent proper
glassbreak detector operation.

Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8
Tamper Supervision for the Hardwired Zones
The system can be programmed to monitor for either an
open condition or a short condition of a tamper switch
on zones 1-8. End-of-line supervision is required for this
option.
Wiring a Tamper Switch to Zones 1-8
The wiring of the tamper switch depends on whether
the tamper switch and the sensor are normally open or
normally closed.
•
If you are using a normally closed sensor, the
tamper switch must be normally open. Refer to
Figure 3-14 for the wiring configuration.
•
If you are using a normally open sensor, the
tamper switch must be normally closed. Refer to
Figure 3-15 for the wiring configuration.
To wire a tamper switch on a hardwired zone, connect
the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across
the zone’s terminals. You must connect the EOL
resistor at the last detector for proper operation
of the tamper supervision.
NOTE: For the normally closed sensor, program
the zone for trouble on short. For the normally open
sensor, program the zone for trouble on open.
NOTE: For zones with a response type of 9 or 16 (Fire),
the tamper selection must be “0” none.

SENSOR
TAMPER
SWITCH

2k EOLR

Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop
for Tamper Supervision
+

TAMPER
SWITCH

SENSOR

2k EOLR

Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop
for Tamper Supervision

3-11

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Installing RPM Devices
The polling loop provides both power and data to the
RPM devices, and is constantly monitoring the status of
all zones enabled on the loop. The maximum current
draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more
than 128mA (unless the system uses a 4297 Polling
Loop Extender Module).
Devices that can be programmed via either DIP
switches or the built-in unique serial number
must be set for serial number mode operation.
All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel
to the [+] and [-] polling loop terminals of the control
panel (28 and 29). You can wire from device to device,
or have multiple branches connected directly to the
control panel in a star configuration.
Do not run polling loop wires within 6” of AC
power, telephone, or intercom wiring. The
polling loop is carrying data between the control
panel and the devices, interference on this loop
can cause an interruption of this communication.
The polling loop can also cause outgoing
interference on the intercom or phone lines. If
this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire
must be used. (Note that the maximum total
wire length supported is cut in half when
shielded wire is used.)

The Quest 2260SN can be programmed as a
“Smart Contact” in Zone Progamming. This
prevents those PIRs from displaying faults
during the disarmed state. You cannot mix
Quest 2260SN “Smart Contacts” with non“Smart Contacts” in the system.

Compatible Polling Loop Devices
Model
Number

Type

4208
4190WH
4278
4275
4194
4297
4192SD
4192SDT
4192SDTM

8-Zone Expander
2-Zone Expander
Quad PIR
Dual PIR
Surface-Mount Reed Contact (Wide Gap)
Extender Module
Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices
Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector
Same as above and provides maintenance
signals
Same as above and provides maintenance
signals
Ionization Smoke Detector
Same as above and provides maintenance
signals
Serial Number Single-Output Relay Module
Universal 8-Zone Expander
Serial Number Surface-Mount Reed Contacts

5192
4192CP
4192CPM
4101SN
4208U
4939SN-BR
4939SN-GY
4191SNWH
4959SN
7500
9500
4209U
4193SN
4293SN
4190SN
998MX

Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact
Aluminum Overhead Door Contact
Single Technology Glassbreak Detector
Dual Technology Glassbreak Detector
Universal Group Zoning Module
Serialized 2-Zone Expander
Serialized 1-Zone Expander
Serialized 2-Zone Expander
Serialized PIR

To install polling loop devices, perform the following steps:

•

•
•
•
•

•

The 4208 must be mounted either inside the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP cabinet or in a
separate enclosure that has a tampersupervised cover.
The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and
the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.
The 4278 right loop cannot be used.
The 4194 is not UL Listed.
The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Auxiliary Power Output
or from a UL Listed supplementary power
supply.
The 7500 and 9500 detectors are not UL Listed.

Step

Action

Select devices from the list of compatible
devices shown previously.

Set the DIP switches in the device (if
required). Refer to the device’s instructions
for the DIP Switch Tables.

Mount each device in the desired location.
Refer to the device’s instructions.

Run wires from the control panel to each
device on the polling loop (see Figure 3-16).
No individual wire run may exceed the
lengths shown in the following table.
Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

•
•
•

3-12

Twisted-pair is recommended for all wire runs.
No more than 64mA may be drawn on any
individual wire run.
When a star configuration is used, the total
length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed
4000 ft (2000 ft. if you are using unshielded wire
in conduit or shielded wire).

Wire Gauge

Max. Length

#22 gauge

650 feet

#20 gauge

950 feet

#18 gauge

1500 feet

#16 gauge

2400 feet

Section 3 - Installing the Control
Step

Action

Wire each device to the polling loop, making
sure of the correct polarity (refer to the
device’s instructions).
NOTE: If you are using serial number
devices, and intend to enroll each device
through the keypad automatically, wire no
more than 25 of these devices to the
control at a time. Then power up and
program them before connecting the next 25.
Leave previously enrolled devices connected.
If you intend to manually enter the serial
numbers through the keypad or through
Compass downloading software, all the
devices may be connected before powering
up to program.

A trouble on zone 997 prevents a partition from
being armed, unless all polling loop zones on
that partition are bypassed.
Using the 4297 Polling Loop Extender
The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide
additional polling loop current, to extend the polling
loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual
electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to Figures 3-17
and 3-18, to follow.

POLLING LOOP

Polling Loop Supervision
A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on
zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only. If
annunciation is desired, program the zone as type 05 or
type 19.
If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot
"see" that device), the system displays a trouble
condition for all zones on that device. If the panel is
armed when a device fails, and the zone is a burglary
zone, the will go into alarm

DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender
module with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP.
4190
RPM

TO RIGHT LOOP

Be sure to include the total current drawn on
the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary
load on the panel’s power supply.
polling_loop-002-V0

4192SD
SMOKE

4278
PIR

Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the
Control Panel

INPUT POLLING LOOP
RPM

INPUT LOOP LIMITS:
• 128 mA MAX. LIMIT CURRENT TO 64mA ON ANY
INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN.
• NO MORE THAN 64 DEVICES MAY BE USED.
• NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN CAN EXCEED:
GAUGE
#22
#20

LENGTH
650 FT
950 FT

#18

1500 FT

#16

2400 FT

4297

RPM

TO
OTHER
RPMS

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP LIMITS = SAME AS INPUT LOOP

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:
• NO MORE THAN119 DEVICES COMBINED.
• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH
LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT.
(3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED ). WIRE IN
CONDUIT, OR IF USING SHIELDED WIRE

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT
EXCEED 4000FT. (2000FT. IF USING SHIELDED WIRE)

polling_loop_003-V1

RPM

CONTROL PANEL

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module

3-13

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #1
• DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN
SERIES (i.e., DO NOT CONNECT ONE
MODULE'S EXTENSION LOOP TO
ANOTHER MODULE'S INPUT LOOP.)

CONTROL PANEL

4297

RPM

INPUT POLLING LOOP
EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2
RPM

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:
• NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION
LOOP #1. NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND
EXTENSION LOOP #2.
• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1
COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN
CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE). TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT
LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #2 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF
USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE).

polling_loop-004-V1

4297

Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules
NOTE: The input loop limits stated in Figure 3-17 apply to Figure 3-18 as well.

Wireless Zone Expansion
1.

The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup
Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial
Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and
transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial
Burglary applications.

The following table lists the receivers that may be used
and the number of zones they support.
5800 Series Receivers
Receiver
5881L
5881M
5881H
5881ENHC

Zones
up to 8
up to 16
up to 250
up to 250 (use with UL864 installations

UL
•

•

•
In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882
Series receivers. Information about the 5881
Receivers applies as well to the 5882
Receivers. Both receivers use the same
transmitters.
RF System Operation and Supervision
The 5800 RF system operation has the following
characteristics:
•
The receiver responds to a frequency of 345MHz.
•
The receiver has a nominal range of 200 feet.
•
Supervised transmitters send a supervisory signal
every 70-90 minutes.
•
Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF
reception of receivers 2 and 1, respectively. The
reception is supervised for the following two
conditions:

3-14

The receiver goes “deaf” (doesn’t hear from any
transmitter) within a programmed interval of time
(defined by program field 1*30).
Proper RF reception is impeded (i.e., jamming or
other RF interference). The control checks for this
condition every 45 seconds.

•

A response type (05 Day/Night) must be
st
programmed for zones 990 (1 receiver) and
nd
988 (2 receiver) for UL installations.

The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back
tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary
installations.
You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic
housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports
a tamper condition.
The control checks the receiver connections about
every 45 seconds. The receiver supervisory zone is 8
+ 2-digit receiver device address (for example,
Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805).
NOTE: This zone must be programmed with a
response type (e.g., type 05 Day/Night Trouble)
before it supervises the connection to the receiver.
Use two identical receivers to provide either a
greater area of coverage or redundant protection.
They must be set for different addresses.
Any zone from 1 to 250 can be used as a 5800
Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64
(reserved for a wireless keypad).

Section 3 - Installing the Control
RF System Installation Advisories
•
Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area.
Do not place it on or near metal objects. This will
decrease the range and/or block transmissions.
•
Install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the
control panel or any keypads, to avoid interference
from the microprocessors in these units.
•
If dual receivers are used:
a. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other,
as well as from the control panel and remote
keypads.
b. Each receiver must be set to a different device
address. The receiver set to the lower address
is considered the 1st RF receiver for
supervisory purposes.
c. The House IDs must be the same.
d. Using two receivers does not increase the
number of transmitters the system can support
(249 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless
keypad).

Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers
Take note of the address you select for the RF
receiver, as this address must be enabled in
the system’s Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode.
To install the 5881 RF receiver, perform the following
steps:
Step

Action

Mount the receiver, following the advisories
stated previously.

Set the DIP switches in the receiver for the
address (01-07). See Figure 3-20.
Make sure the address setting is not
being used by another device (keypad,
relay module, etc.).

If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flathead screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab
as shown in Figure 3-19. When the receiver is
pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break
off and remain on the wall. This will activate
a tamper switch in the receiver and cause
generation of a tamper signal. Note that this
signal will also be generated when the
receiver’s front cover is removed.

Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the
keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug
the connector at the other end of the harness
into the receiver.

Refer to the Installation Instructions
provided with the receiver for installations
regarding antenna mounting, etc.

SCREW

5881ENHC-001-V0

Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper
Protection
ANTENNAS

TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD
CONNECTION POINTS. EACH RECEIVER
MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN.
USE MAX. of 220 ft. [67m of #22 (0.64mm)
WIRE or 550 ft. (168m) of #18 (1mm) WIRE
FOR EACH RUN. OBSERVE 20 ft. MAX.
FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.
(SEE RECEIVER'S INSTRUCTIONS.)

INSERT IN
RIGHT-HAND
TERMINALS

CIRCUIT
BOARD
MOUNTING
HOLES

YELLOW
RED
BLACK
GREEN

WIRING
OPENING

DIP SWITCH WHITE AREAS = SWITCH
HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE
RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT
CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW
SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."

SWITCH RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS
(" - " MEANS OFF)
POSITION
0
5
4

DIP SWITCH

INTERFERENCE
INDICATOR LED

PLUG & SOCKET

DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)

PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)

3
2
1

ON
ON ON

ON ON ON ON
FOR FUTURE USE

ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL
FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS)*.
OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE
INSTALLATIONS.
* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS
THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED
IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS).

5881-001-V0

Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)

3-15

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Installing the 5800TM Module
Installation of this module is necessary only if you are
using a 5827BD or 5804BD Bi-directional device.
This address for the 5800TM must be enabled
in the control’s Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode as a keypad and then assigned to
a partition.
To install the 5800TM, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the unit using its accompanying
mounting bracket near the RF receiver.
The 5800TM must not be installed within
the control cabinet. It must be between
one and two feet from the receiver’s
antennas.
Set the module for the appropriate address.
For Address Setting 28 cut the red jumper;
for Address 29 cut the white jumper; for
Address 30 cut both jumpers.
Make sure the address setting is not
being used by another device (keypad,
relay module, etc.).
Connect the module’s wire harness to the
keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug
the connector at the other end of the harness
into the module.

House ID Sniffer Mode
This mode applies only if you are using a wireless
keypad (5827/5827BD). Use the House ID Sniffer mode
to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in
use in a nearby system. The House ID must be
programmed for the receiver in Device Programming in
the #93 Menu Mode.
To enter House ID Sniffer mode, enter your Installer
Code + [#] + [2].
The receiver now “sniffs” out any House IDs in the area
and displays them. Keep the receiver in this mode for
about 2 hours. Use a House ID that is not displayed.
Exit the Sniffer mode by entering your Installer Code
+ OFF.
As Sniffer mode effectively disables RF point
reception, Sniffer mode cannot be entered
while any partition is armed.

3-16

5800 Series Transmitter Setup
•
Transmitters have built-in serial numbers that
must be enrolled in the system using the #93 Menu
Mode Programming, or via the downloader.
•
Transmitters do not have DIP switches (except
5827, described separately).
•
Some transmitters can support more than one
“zone” (loops or inputs) (e.g., 5816, 5817). Each loop
must be assigned a different zone number.
•
For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such
as the 5804 and 5804BD, you must assign a unique
zone number to each individual button used on the
transmitter.
The 5808 smoke detector can be programmed
as a “Smart Contact” in Zone Progamming.
This enables the detector to monitor
maintenance signals and may prevent false
alarms from a “dirty” detector.
Transmitter Supervision
Supervised RF transmitters send a check-in signal to
the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one
check-in is not received from each supervised
transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31),
the “missing” transmitter number(s) and “CHECK” or
“TRBL” are displayed. Unsupervised RF transmitters
(5802MN, 5804) may be carried off the premises.
Some transmitters have built-in tamper protection, and
annunciate a “CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers
are removed.
If a loss of supervision occurs on a transmitter
programmed for Fire, it reports in Contact ID as
a Fire Trouble (373), not Loss of Supervision
(381), to the central station.
Transmitter Input Types
All transmitters have one or more unique factoryassigned input (loop) codes. Transmitters can be
programmed as one of the following types:
Type

Description

RM
(RF Motion)

Sends periodic check-in signals, fault and lowbattery signals. The control panel
automatically restores the zone to “ready” after
a few seconds. It is intended for facilities with
multiple motion detectors that may fault and
restore simultaneously. The transmitter must
remain within the receiver’s range.
NOTE: RF Motion may only be used on
loop 1 of a door/window type transmitter.

RF
(Supervised
RF)

Sends periodic check-in signals, fault,
restore, and low-battery signals. The
transmitter must remain within the receiver’s
range.

UR
(Unsupervised
RF)

Sends all the signals that the RF type does,
but the control does not supervise the
check-in signals. The transmitter may be
carried off-premises.

BR
(Unsupervised
Button RF)

These send only fault signals. They do not
send low-battery signals until they are
activated. The transmitter may be carried
off-premises.

Section 3 - Installing the Control
Transmitter Battery Life
Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4
to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and
the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as
humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large
swings in temperature may all reduce the actual
battery life in a given installation.
The wireless system can identify a true low battery
situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system
time to arrange a change of battery and maintain
protection for that point within the system.

Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803)
contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries. At the
end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced
(and a new serial number enrolled at the control).
Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP and
5803) should be periodically tested, as these
transmitters do not send supervisory check-in signals.
To test the transmitters using the Transmitter
ID Sniffer mode and the Go/NoGo Test Mode,
see the SECTION 10: Testing the System for
the procedures.

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
Model

Product

Input Type

Model

Product

Input Type

5801
5802
5802CP
5802MN
5802MN2
5804
5804BD

Panic Transmitter
Pendant (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)
Belt Clip (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)
Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)
Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)
Wireless Key Transmitter
Wireless Key Bi-directional
Transmitter
Wireless Key Bi-directional
Transmitter with Voice
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors.
5808 is UL Listed for Fire

UR or RF
BR Only

5816
5816MN
5816TEMP
5817
5818
5827
5827BD
5849
5850
5890
5890PI

Door/Window Transmitter
Miniature Door/Window Transmitter
Temperature Sensor Transmitter
Multi-Point Universal Transmitter
Recessed Transmitter
Wireless Keypad
Wireless Bi-directional Keypad
Glassbreak Detector
Glassbreak Detector
PIR Detector
PIR Detector with Pet Immunity

5804BDV
5806/5807/
5808

UR or RF
UR or RF
BR Only
BR Only
BR Only
RF

RF
RF
House ID
House ID
RF
RF
RF
RF

Installing Output Devices
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP supports up to 96
outputs. Each device must be programmed as to how to
act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to
deactivate (STOP). The 4204, 4204CF, FSA-8, FSA-24,
and/or 4140SN may be used as output devices.
NOTE: The first 32 of the 96 Output Devices may
be supervised (zones 601-632). Only the relays on
4204CF modules may be supervised. If
supervision is programmed for other types of
Output Devices, unpredictable results may occur.
Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules
Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C
(normally open and normally closed) contacts. Each
4204CF module adds two style Y supervised
Notification Appliance Circuits to the system. For
4204CF modules, only relays 1 and 3 on each module
can be programmed.
The relay module will not operate until the
device address you have set the DIP switches
for is enabled in the control’s Device
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

To install the relay modules, see Figures 3-21 and 3-22
and perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a
device address 01-15.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
Mount the 4204 and 4204CF modules per the
instructions provided with them.
Connect the module’s wire harness to the
control (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug the connector
on the harness to the module.
When mounting remotely, homerun each
module to the control. The table below shows
the maximum wire run lengths. Refer to the
instructions provided with the 4204CF for its
maximum permissible wire lengths.

2
3

Wire Gauge
#22
#20
#18
#16

Maximum Length
125 feet
200 feet
300 feet
500 feet

3-17

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

—

4204

—

10 11 12

RELAY

DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS
AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

TYPICAL
(SHOWN "OFF")
RELAY

8
7
6
5
4

➞

GRN
RED

DATA IN
FROM CONTROL

▲

—

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED ➞
TB1
13

BLK

TB2

(–) GROUND
DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
(+) 12V

Step

Action

Set the FSA’s DIP switches for a device
address from 08 to 23. See the module’s
instructions for the DIP switch table.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
Mount the FSA module horizontally to a
duplex box (quad box for FSA-24).
Connect the module to the control’s keypad
terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14).

Installing 4101SN Relay Modules
The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a
serial number polling loop output device. The 4101SN
features the following:

•

3-18

POLARIZED
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
–

+
NC
NC
TB2

(–) GROUND

}

NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE A
2K EOLR
#610-7

—

- ALARM POLARITY
SHOWN
- EACH OUTPUT
PROVIDES
STYLE Y
SUPERVISION
- EACH OUTPUT
RATED 1.2A MAX
- USE
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES
COMPATIBLE
WITH
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
RATING

POWER FOR
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B
8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A
DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND
CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE
POWER LIMITED

GRN

DATA OUT
TO CONTROL

RED

(+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE
CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT
DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER
ACTIVE OUTPUT)

Dip Switch

00000

Terminal
Block
SIDE
VIEW
All Switches shown
in Up position.
(ECP Address 23)

Connect to
Keypad
Terminals
ECP Bus

Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module
The FSA module will not operate until the device
address you have set the DIP switches for is
enabled in the control’s Device Programming in
the #93 Menu Mode.

•

Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with
tamper-protected cover.

•

▲
DATA IN
FROM CONTROL

Optional
Keyswitch
Connection

The position of the relay is supervised, but not
the actual external contact wiring.

Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC
with contact supervision.
One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary
input zone.
Operating power and communication with control
panels via the V-Plex polling loop.

NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE B
2K EOLR
#610-7

Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module

•

16
YEL

–
NC

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

Installing the FSA Modules
The 8-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-8 and
24-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-24 enable a
fire response unit to identify quickly the point/zone of a
fire. These indicators may be used for other functions as
well, such as status indication. A maximum of 4 FSA
modules, in any combination, can be supported.
To install the FSA module, refer to Figure 3-23 and
perform the following steps:

DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE
ADDRESS AND
ENABLING/DISABLING
TAMPER

Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module

—

➞

BLK

—

RELAY

➞
YEL

—

13 14 15 16

—

NO
C

RELAY

➞

TB1

—

➞

EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED ➞

—

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

—

➞
➞
➞
➞

➞

9 10 11 12

—

–

4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS
("—" means "OFF")

➞

—

1 2

➞

SWITCH
POSITION

➞ ON

OFF

➞

4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS
("—" means "OFF")

➞
➞
➞
➞

SWITCH
POSITION

➞ ON

OFF

If are using ZONE # for the START of a
polling loop output, and want the output to
stop when the same zone restores, the
STOP programming must be blank.
No more than 20 polling loop outputs may
be programmed for the same START or
STOP condition in Output Programming.

Connect the device to the polling loop, terminals 28 (+)
and 29 (-). Be sure to observe polarity

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Installing a Remote Keyswitch

Operation
•
A momentary short arms the partition in the
AWAY mode, and a short held for more than 10
seconds arms the partition in STAY mode 1. A
subsequent short disarms the partition.
•
The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition’s status
(see table that follows).
•
A momentary short silences Notification Appliance
Circuits and keypad sounds, and disarms the
system if it was armed. A subsequent short clears
the alarm memory indication and resets 2-wire
smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).
•
The keyswitch can be used to silence fire alarms
without disarming the burglary portion (program a
“9” in field ✳15). A momentary short silences alarm
outputs only if a fire alarm is present.

Keyswitch Tamper Operation
The tamper switch need not be used for fire or UL
Household Burglary installations. For UL Commercial
Burglary installations, the tamper switch must be
wired to zone 6, see Figure 3-24).
Program zone 6 for Day Trouble/Night Alarm (response
type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from the wall,
the tamper switch opens, causing an alarm or trouble
on the zone. This also causes the control to disable
keyswitch operation until the tamper is restored and
the associated partition is disarmed.
Wiring for the Remote Keyswitch
To install the ADEMCO 4146 keyswitch, perform the
following steps:
Step

Action

Connect the ADEMCO 4146 to the panel as
shown in Figure 3-24.

If you are using the tamper, make sure it is
connected to a zone.
(ARMED)
RED

In UL commercial fire installations, mount the
keyswitch next to the keypad. The keypad
displays the UL-required “FIRE BELL
SILENCED” when the keyswitch is used to
silence a fire alarm.

TO OUT 1 (J2 PIN 7)
TO GND (J2 PIN 8)

Red
Off
Off
On Steady
Slow Flash
Rapid Flash

820
OHMS

TO OUT 5 (J2 PIN 6)
TO ZONE 8 + (TERM 27)
TO ZONE 7/ZONE 8 - (TERM 26)

2000
OHMS

TAMPER
SWITCH
(N.C.)

LOCK
SWITCH (N.O.)

LED Indications
Green
On
Off
Off
Off
Off

820
OHMS

(READY)
GREEN

TO ZONE 7 + (TERM 25)

Indication
Disarmed & Ready
Disarmed & Not Ready
Armed Away
Armed Stay
Alarm Memory

2000
OHMS
EOLR
4146 KEYSWITCH

4146_keyswitch-001-V0

A UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO
4146, can be used for remote arming/disarming of the
burglary part of the system and for silencing alarms.
The keyswitch operates in only one particular partition.
The keyswitch is wired across zone 7. This zone is no
longer available as a protection zone. Be sure to
program Zone 7 with a response type (e.g., type 10).

Figure 3-24: Remote Keyswitch Wiring

The keyswitch reports as user 0, if Open/Close
reporting is enabled in field ✳40.

Installing a 5140LED Indicator Module
An optional 5140LED Indicator Module can be installed
in municipalities, which require dedicated indicators for
communicator fault status. The 5140LED provides the
following indicators:
• AC POWER:
• ON if AC Power is present.
• OFF if AC Power is not present.
• COMM FAILURE:
• ON if maximum number of attempts were made
(field 3✳21) to transmit a message to the central
station. Enter User Code + OFF following a
successful transmission to turn off.
• OFF is normal.

•

DIALER 1 FAULT:
• ON if main dialer line is faulted. Correct problem
and then enter User Code + OFF to turn off.
• OFF if normal.
DIALER 2 FAULT
• ON if backup dialer line is faulted. Correct
problem, and then enter User Code + OFF to
turn off.
• OFF if normal.

3-19

VIOLET

GRAY

YELLOW

GREEN

WHITE

BLUE

J2 CONNECTOR
3 4 5 6 7 8

RED

BROWN

4142 TR CABLE WIRE COLORS

OU
T
OU 4
T
OU 7
T
OU 3
T
OU 6
T
OU 2
T
OU 5
GR T 1
OU
IN ND
PU
T
1

Wiring for the 5140LED Indicator Module
Program “2” field 3✳20 and connect the 5140LED
Module to the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-25. It
is designed for mounting into a standard single-gang
electrical box.
To install the 5140LED Indicator Module, perform the
following steps:

BLACK

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4142 TR CABLE

Action

Pull wires from the control panel’s J2
connector through an opening ion the singlegang box and splice these wires to the modules
flying leads. Solderless splices may be used.

Mount the module’s PC board onto one side of
the PC board retainer bracket (supplied).
Slide the PC board retainer bracket into the
box and fasten with screws (supplied).
Mount the stainless steel decorative cover
(supplied) onto the box.

3
4

5140LED MODULE

AC POWER

BROWN

DIALER 2 FAULT

GREEN

COMM FAILURE

ORANGE

DIALER 1 FAULT

YELLOW

DIALER 1 FAULT

BLUE

DIALER 2 FAULT

(TO TERM 11)

COMM FAILURE

RED
FUTURE USE

TO AUX
PWR 1
OUTPUT

AC POWER

RED

(TO TERM 12)

J2_trigcon-003-V0

Step

BLACK

–

BLACK

5140LED MODULE
WIRE COLORS

Figure 3-25: Wiring the 5140LED Indicator Module

Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder
J2 CONNECTOR
8

PU
IN

R
O

5
U
O

2
U

3
T
O

U
O

(GRAY)

(VIOLET)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

BLUE

(BROWN)

BLACK

4142TR CABLE
BLACK

AMSECO PAL-328N
PIEZO SOUNDER
(10MA)

RED

J2_trigcon-006-V0

An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be
used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad’s
built-in sounder. The remote sounder will duplicate all
sounds (such as alarms, trouble beeps, etc.) except for
the short beeps associated with keypad key depression.
One application of this feature would be to produce
chime beeps at a distant location from the keypads.
If used, program field 3✳20 must be set to “0” and field
✳15 must be set to the desired partition number.
The remote sounder must be connected to the Output 5
on the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring

Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module
The VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) connects to the
keypad (ECP) terminals on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP and also connects to other PLMs via the RS485 bus (3-wire twisted cable run). Figure 3-27 is a
block diagram of a panel linking setup using three
control panels.

ECP Wire Run Limitations
Determine wire gauge by referring to the table below.
Wire Run Length Table
Wire Gauge
Length
#22 gauge
450 feet
#20 gauge
700 feet
#18 gauge
1100 feet
#16 gauge
1750 feet

Panel Linking is not permitted in UL
installations.

CONTROL
PANEL

ECP

•
CONSOLE

•

PLM

CONSOLE

PLM

RS-485

PLM

CONSOLE

PLG-001-V0

Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram

3-20

The length of the ECP wire runs combined
must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded
cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is
run in conduit or if shielded cable is used).
If more than one ECP device is wired to a
single run, then the above maximum lengths
must be divided by the number of devices on
the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet
if two keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

Section 3 - Installing the Control
RS-485 Bus Wire Run Limitations
The RS-485 bus from the first PLM to the last PLM
cannot exceed 4000 feet, using 16-AWG twisted cable.
The recommended form of wiring is to daisy chain the
connection from one unit to another. If several buildings
are to be connected, the RS-485 bus should form a
continuous path from one building to the next.
Avoid wiring units in a star configuration, where
multiple branches are formed. Star configurations
create loading and capacitance problems that are
complex, and become difficult to troubleshoot.

Step

Action

Connect the 12V (+) and (–) and data-out and
data-in connections from the PLM to the
control’s keypads terminals (11, 12, 13 and
14), respectively.

Connect the 3-wire RS-485 cable between
each PLM. Recommended wiring is to bring
the wires “in” from one module (or control
panel) to terminals 5 (+), 6 (-), and 7 (G) and
“out” to the next module from terminals TB18 (+), 9 (-), and 10 (G).

Mounting and Wiring the Panel Link Module

DIP
SWITCH

The PLM will not operate until the device is
enabled in the control’s Device Programming in
#93 Menu Mode.

12345678

+
_

ECP OUT
ECP IN

To mount and wire the Panel Link Module, refer to
Figure 3-28 and perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Remove all power from the control panel
before making any wiring connections.

Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, adjacent to the cabinet,
using 2-faced adhesive tape.

+
_
G
+
_

RS-485

TAMPER
REED
SWITCH

PIEZO
SOUNDER

EOL
JUMPER
PINS
PLG-002-V0

Figure 3-28: VA8200 Panel Link Module Wiring

Set the PLM’s DIP switches for a device
address between 01 and 30. See the module’s
instructions for the DIP switch table.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP
The control can support an ECP Long Range Radio
(LRR) (7820, 7835C, and 7845C are supported) that
connects to control panel’s keypad terminals. All
messages programmed for transmission via the phone
lines may also be sent via the LRR. These messages
are transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the
format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47.
We recommend that, if possible, you use
Contact ID for the main dialer. If Contact ID is
not used, certain types of reports are not sent.
Supervision
The data lines between the control and the LRR, as well
as certain functions in the radio, can be supervised.
If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs,
both the LRR and the control’s dialer can be
programmed to send a Trouble message to the central
station.
NOTE: For complete information, see the Installation
Instructions that accompany the radio.

Operation
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP features Dynamic
Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority
message reporting when Long Range Radio is used.
These message outputs are accessed through data fields
✱56 and ✱57, respectively. The Dynamic Signaling
feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant
reports sent to the central station.
The feature is described as follows:
Dynamic Signaling Delay (Field ✱56)
Select the time the panel should wait for
acknowledgment from the first reporting destination
before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225
seconds, in 15-second increments.
Dynamic Signaling Priority (Field ✱57)
Select the initial reporting destination for messages,
Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1).

3-21

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

If Priority
(✱57) is…

And message is… Then…

Primary
Phone No.
("0")

Acknowledged
before delay
expires

Message is removed
from queue and no
message is sent to
LRR.

Not acknowledged
before delay
expires

Message is sent to
both the Primary
Phone No. and LRR.

Acknowledged
before delay
expires

Message is removed
from queue and no
message is sent to
Primary Phone No.

Not acknowledged
before delay
expires

Message is sent to
both the Primary
Phone No. and LRR.

Long
Range
Radio ("1")

Additional LRR reporting options are defined by
selecting the events for each subscriber ID in fields 58
and 59. The reporting events are Alarms, Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test.
Also, within an enabled category, the specific event
must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance,
zone 10 is enabled to report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10
will report via the LRR, but Zone 11 will not.
Messages arec transmitted from the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP to the LRR on a “first in/first
out” basis. If events occur at the same time, they are
transmitted in order of priority. The priority from most
to least important is : Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms,
Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all
other types of reports.

There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the
LRR: primary and secondary. These correspond to the
two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for
each partition. If a subscriber ID for a partition is not
programmed (disabling reports to that central station),
the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID
in the LRR will not be transmitted.
If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers
(dual reporting), then reporting through the LRR will
be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in
the queue is transmitted to both the primary and the
secondary radio central stations before transmitting the
second event.
If split reporting is selected for the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP, then the LRR will send the
appropriate reports to the primary and secondary
central stations.
Installing the ECP Long Range Radio
To install the LRR, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the radio according to the
instructions that accompany the radio.

Connect the data in/out terminals and
voltage input terminals of the radio to the
control’s keypad connection points,
terminals 11, 12, 13 and 14. See Figure 3-29.

11
12
13
14
CONTROL
TERMINALS

RED
BLACK
GREEN

LONG
RANGE
RADIO

YELLOW
LRR-001-V0

The chart below provides an explanation of how the
Dynamic Signaling feature functions.

Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad
Terminals
Trouble Messages
The following messages are displayed on the 6139/6160
when a problem exists on the Long Range Radio:
1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio
is low.
2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault
and cannot transmit any messages.
3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without
a valid transmission.
4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never
attained.
5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained
throughout the transmission.
6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has
been detected.
7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt
(the internal CRC is bad).

3-22

NOTES:
Items 2 and 3 require factory service.
Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low
battery.
If the item 6 message appears, check the antenna,
connection and cable; if they are secure, factory service
is required.
All these messages are displayed in conjunction with
the “CHECK 8xx” message, which indicates a trouble
on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in
the control.
All of these events except Antenna Fault are sent to the
event log and reported to the central station using
Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble).
Antenna Fault uses Event Code 357. If the tamper is
tripped on the LRR, it uses Event Code 341 (expansion
device tamper).

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers
These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm
signaling equipment such as ADEMCO’s 7720,
7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios.
The triggers are common to all partitions and must be
enabled for each partition (field 2✳20).
If using the Alpha Pager Module, you cannot
use a Long Range Radio connected to the J2
triggers.

The fire and burglary/audible panic alarm triggers are
normally LOW and go HIGH until a User Code + OFF
is entered in all enabled partition(s) that display these
conditions.
The silent panic/duress trigger latches HIGH, except for
duress, which is momentary.
Refer to the installation instructions that accompany
your radio for the connections to the control panel.

Installing the Alpha Pager Module
The VA8201 Alpha Pager Module (APM) is used for the
transmission of alphanumeric messages to a usersubscribed Paging Service. The APM will dial and can
be programmed to send the information to up to 8
different paging services. In addition, the module can
direct the reports to a parallel or serial printer.
NOTE: The APM is only required for alphanumeric
format. The system sends numeric format messages
directly.
The Alpha Pager Module is not permitted in UL
installations.

The types of events (messages) the pager can transmit
are divided into 6 categories: alarms, troubles,
bypasses, openings/closings, system, and test.
The options for each paging service are:
•
Paging service phone number
•
Format (numeric, alphanumeric)
•
Two Delay Times (numeric format only): the time
between dialing and transmitting of pager ID and
the time between pager ID and event information
•
Pager ID number (if necessary)
•
Partition(s) (which partitions the events are
transmitted for)
•
Types of messages (events) sent). Must be
programmed for the pager to work.
The APM hangs up between each message. Multiple
messages are sent in the order received. If the APM
cannot make contact with the paging service, it retries
up to 10 times.

•
•

When using the APM, field ✳14 must be
programmed for RS232 input (1).
The APM transmits alphanumeric messages
using the TAP protocol. The installer must
check with the paging service to ensure that
they are using the TAP protocol Rev. 1.8 or
higher.

Paging Service Advisory
If you are setting up the software for the first time,
contact your paging service provider for the following
two pieces of information:
•
The exact access number to be used with each
receiving device
•
The correct PIN number for each receiving device.
Pager Formats
The system supports pager formats alphanumeric and
numeric.
Alphanumeric
PP Date Time EA ZZZ SSSS AD
Where:
PP
Partition number (e.g., P1)
Date
Date the event occurred (e.g., 03/15/00)
Time
Time the event occurred (e.g., 01:16AM)
EA
Event alpha descriptor (see APPENDIX D)
Zone or user number ✳
The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number
(in field ✳32)
AD
The zone’s programmable alpha descriptor
✳
✳ If the event is an arming or disarming, a 6character descriptor can be sent for the user, if
programmed, instead of the user number. The
descriptor can be programmed only via the
Compass Downloader.
The installer code has a default of INSTLR and
user number 002 has a default of MASTER for
the 6-character descriptor.
Numeric Format
SSSS P EEE ZZ, where:
SSSS The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number (field
✳32)
P
Partition number
EEE
3-digit event code
ZZZ
3-digit zone or user number
NOTE: If any of the digits for the subscriber number
are hex digits (B, C, D, E, F), they will be replaced with
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively, on the pager display.
ZZZ
SSSS

3-23

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Numeric Format Event Codes
Event

Code

Alarm

333

Trouble

555

Open

444

777

Other

000

Wiring the Alpha Pager Module
The Alpha Pager Module connects via the 4142TR cable
to the J2 connector on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP.
•
•

Mounting the Alpha Pager Module
The Alpha Pager Module (APM) may be mounted in the
control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not
possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.

To wire the Alpha Pager Module, refer to Figure 3-30
and perform the following steps:

Do not mount the Alpha Pager Module on the
cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC
board.
To mount the Alpha Pager Module, perform the
following steps:
Step

Action

If you are mounting the Alpha Pager Module
inside the control cabinet, attach it to the
cabinet’s interior surface with 2-faced
adhesive tape.

If using a serial printer, it must be configured
for a baud rate of 1200, seven data bits, even
parity, and one stop bit. (7/E/1).
Automation software cannot be used if a serial
printer is used on the system.

If you are mounting the Alpha Pager Module
outside the cabinet, use the bracket
interface (Ademco Part Number K5350).

Step

Action

Connect the 4142TR to J2 on the control.

Connect the Red wire of 4142TR to the
Orange wire of the APM, and the Black wire
of the 4142TR to the Green wire of the APM.

Connect the Red and Black wires of the APM
to terminals 11 and 12 (auxiliary power (+)
and (-), respectively) of the control.

Connect the APM RJ11 connectors labeled
LINE and PHONE to RJ31X jacks as shown
in Figure 3-30.

Connect the premises phones and the control
panel phone cord as shown in Figure 3-30.

If you are using a parallel or serial printer,
connect the printer according to the
instructions accompanying the APM.

RED
BLACK
ORANGE
GRAY

GREEN

BLACK

SERIAL
OUTPUT

RJ31X

TIP

RING

RED
PARALLEL
OUTPUT

ORANGE

DATA/
POWER

BROWN

VA8201 ALPHA PAGER MODULE

TO
PREMISES
PHONES

HOME AUTOMATION COMPUTER

GRAY

GREEN

BROWN
TO PHONE
RJ11

GRAY
BROWN

TO LINE
RJ11

PARALLEL PRINTER

GREEN
RED

620
PHONE CORD

RED

VIOLET

GREEN

SPLICE

GREEN

RED

ORANGE

INCOMING
PHONE LINE

SPLICE
BLACK

RED

4142TR

RJ31X

RED

5
8

RING

GREEN

TIP

J2
12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GREEN

COMMERCIAL FIRE/BURGLARY CONTROL PANEL

Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module

3-24

APM-001-V0

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Access Control Using VistaKey
The VistaKey is a single-door access control module.
When connected to the alarm system, it provides access
control to the protected premises. The VISTA-128FBP
supports up to 8 VistaKey modules, the VISTA-250FBP
supports up to 15 modules (15 access points).

DO NOT USE BOTH the VistaKey and a
PassPoint Access Control System on the same
alarm panel.

The VistaKey module contains three zones.
These zones should ONLY be used for access
control functions in UL installations. THESE
INPUT ZONES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR
FIRE AND BURGLARY APPLICATIONS IN UL
INSTALLATIONS.

VistaKey Features
•
Each VistaKey communicates with the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP via the V-Plex polling loop.
•
If local power to the VistaKey is lost, the module
provides backup monitoring of the access point door
via a built-in V-Plex device that is powered solely
from the polling loop. The V-Plex device is
programmed in the control’s Zone Programming. A
serial number label is affixed to the VistaKey
module for manual entry of its serial number.
•
The VistaKey supports up to 500 cardholders.
•
All configurable options for each VistaKey are
accomplished via software, firmware, and
nonvolatile memory, except the access point zone
number (1-15), which is set via a user-friendly, 16position rotary switch.
•
The addition and removal of VistaKey modules
from the system is easily accomplished via the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP keypad.
•
Each VistaKey provides one open-collector output
trigger (sink 12mA @ 12VDC).

Mounting and Wiring the VistaKey
For detailed instructions on how to install and
program the VistaKey, refer the Installation and
Setup Guide that accompanies the VistaKey-SK.
To mount and wire the VistaKey module, perform the
following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the VistaKey, door strike or mag lock,
and card reader.

Mount the door status monitor (DSM) and/or
request-to-exit (RTE) devices.

Using Figure 3-31 as a reference, connect the
card reader interface cable to TB3, making the
+5V or +12V connection last.

Connect the leads to TB1 in the following
order:
a. All ground leads to terminals 2, 5, and 9.
b. The DSM, (optional) RTE, and General
Purpose leads to terminals 6, 7, and 8,
respectively.
c. Door strike (or mag lock) lead to terminal
10.
d. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to terminal
1.
e. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to the N/C
relay terminal 11 (if a mag lock is being
used), OR to the N/O relay terminal 10 (if a
door strike is being used).

Connect the (–) polling loop and (+) polling
loop leads (from the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP) to terminals 4 and 3, respectively.

Set the Address Select switch to the desired
access door number (1-15).

Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each VistaKey
being installed.

Connecting the Card Reader
Lead from Reader

Lead Color

To VistaKey TB3
Terminal #

Green LED
Ground*
DATA 1 (Clock)
DATA 0 (Data)
+5VDC†
+12VDC†

Orange
Black
White
Green
Red†
Red†

1
2
3
4
6
7

TB-3 Terminal 5 is also a ground and may be used instead of
terminal 2. Terminals 2 and 5 are a common ground.

† Connect to +5VDC OR +12VDC per reader manufacturer’s
specification.

3-25

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

TO TB1, 11 OR 12

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 CLASS A
LIMITS OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) IT MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE.
(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT
MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

14V MAX (12V @ 85-160mA Nominal)
GND
POLLING LOOP +

TO ALARM SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL
POLLING LOOP TERMINALS.

POLLING LOOP GND
ZONE A (DSM)
ZONE B (RTE)
ZONE C (General)
GND
POLE Door Strike/Mag Coil
N/C MAG COIL POWER
N/O DOOR STRIKE POWER

THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARDS 70 &
74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,
BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA. 02269).
PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING AND
REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH
THIS EQUIPMENT.

FOR ADDITIONAL RATINGS AND
SPECIFICATIONS, REFER TO
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
FOR THE VISTAKEY-SK.

WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED
TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
OF THIS SYSTEM.

RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:
3A @ 28VDC MAX. (RESISTIVE LOAD)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TB 1
K1
DOOR
CONTROL
RELAY

TB 3

READER INTERFACE CABLE

RDR LED (ORANGE)
GND (BLACK)
DATA 1 (WHITE)
DATA 0 (GREEN)
GND
+5V
+12V (RED)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

+ 12 VDC TO ONLY
ONE OF THESE INPUTS.
(FROM TB1-1)

NO
CONNECTION

TRIGGER (SEE NOTE 3)
+

NOTE 1: USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS.

VISTAKEY

NOTE 2: VISTAKEY TB3 TERMINAL 5 IS A GROUND AND MAY BE
USED INSTEAD OF TB3 TERMINAL 2. TB3 TERMINALS 2 AND 5 ARE
A COMMON GROUND.
NOTE 3: WHEN USING TRIGGER TO TURN ON AN LED OR BUZZER,
RETURN HIGH SIDE OF LED OR BUZZER TO TB3 TERMINAL 7.
TRIGGER RATING IS 15mA AT 12VDC.

Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey

Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP interfaces with the
PassPoint ACS via the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM).
The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad
terminals) of the control and the network bus of the
PassPoint ACS.
The control sends the VGM its status information,
event log entries, and entry/exit requests (inputs
programmed with response type Access Point) from
keypads, hardwired zones, and RF transmitters. The
VGM then reformats and retransmits this information
to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the PassPoint ACS
network bus.

}

PROM C

4-PIN
KEYPAD
PLUG

TRANSFORMER

GREEN
BLACK
RED

Interfacing the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP
with the PassPoint Access Control System via
the VISTA Gateway Module is not permissible
for UL installations.

Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module
The VISTA Gateway Module is connected between the
ECP bus (VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP keypad
terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access
Control System. See Figure 3-32 for the proper wiring
connections.

3-26

ECHELON NETWORK
(PASSPOINT ACS)

YELLOW

}

TO
CONTROL’S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS

Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Event Log Connections

9
J2 CONNECTOR
VIOLET

NOTES:
If you are using printer, field 3✳19 must = 1.
If you are using a serial printer, it must configured with
7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit, 1200 baud

GREY

Connect the 4142TR cable to J2 on the
control.
Connect the Violet and Red wires of the
4142TR to terminal 1 and 6 on the 4100SM,
respectively.
Connect terminals 8 and 7 of the 4100SM to
terminals 11 and 12 (aux. power (+) and (-)),
respectively of the control.
Connect the serial printer to the 4100SM.
NOTE: The 4100SM Module is supplied with
a 10-foot RS232 cable. A longer cable can be
used if the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP is
separated from the serial printer by more
than 10 feet, but the total cable length should
be less than 50 feet.

Connect the printer according to the
instructions that accompany the APM.

WHITE

YELLOW

Action

Connect the APM to the control (see
Installing the Alpha Pager Module previously
in this section).

RED

Step

GREEN

Using the 4100SM
To connect a serial printer using the 4100SM, refer to
Figure 3-33 and perform the following steps:

Action

BLUE

•

When using a printer, field 3*19 must be
programmed for RS232 input (1).
If you are using a serial printer, J2 pins 5 &
9 on the control panel cannot be used to
interface with Automation software.

Step

BROWN

•

Using the Alpha Pager Module (APM)
To connect a printer using the Alpha Pager Module,
perform the following steps:

BLACK

This system has the ability to record up to 1000 events
of various categories in the Event Log (history log).
Each event is recorded with the time and date of its
occurrence (if real-time clock is set).
The categories are Alarm, Supervisory/Check, Bypass,
Open/Close, System and Test conditions. The log may
be viewed on an alpha keypad, the AUI or printed on a
serial printer.

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
To TB11 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB12 Aux. Power (-)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE
8

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used
DTR

RED

USE GENDER CHANGER
SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM
IF PRINTER HAS DB25
MALE CONNECTOR

BLUE

WHITE

3M
Cable
Supplied with
4100SM

COLOR

FUNCTION

PIN #

RED
BLUE
WHITE

CD
CTS
DSR

8
5
6

SERIAL PRINTER
SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS
EVEN PARITY
STOP BIT
300/1200 BAUD

4100SM-012-V0

4100SM JUMPERS
(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)

Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM
NOTE: See the 4100SM Installation Instructions for
details concerning the serial printer operation.

Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that
permits the user to access the security system (and
relays) via a TouchTone telephone. This may be done
either from the premises or by calling the premises
from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be
used in a security system. This module must be
enabled as Device Address 4 in the Device
Programming in #93 Menu Mode, and must be assigned
to a partition.

The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permitted in
UL installations.

Detailed operating instructions for phone access
to the security system are provided with the VIP
Module.
The 4285/4286 VIP Module features:
•
Allows the user to receive synthesized voice
messages over the phone regarding the status of
the security system.
•
Allows the user to arm and disarm the security
system and perform most other commands using
the telephone keypad.
•
Allows the user to control relays using the
telephone keypad.

3-27

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
•

Provides voice annunciation over the phone to
confirm any command that is entered.
•
Announces many of the same words that would
normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under
the same system conditions. Refer to the words in
bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in the #93
Menu Mode Programming in the Programming
Guide.
•
Can be supervised for connection to control panel
(annunciated and reported as Zone 804).
The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and
the premises’ handset(s) (see Figure 3-34). It listens for
TouchTones on the phone line and reports them to the
control panel. During on-premises phone access, it
powers the premises phones; during off-premises phone
access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and
any answering machines.
• The VIP module will not operate until the
device address (04) is enabled in the control’s
Device Programming in #93 Menu Mode.
• Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet
door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
To install the VIP module, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, if this is not possible, on
the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.
If you mount the VIP Module inside the
control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet’s
interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape.
You may leave the module’s cover off if it is
mounted within the cabinet.
If you mount the module outside the
cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear to
mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced
adhesive tape may be used, if preferred).

Affix the 4285/4286 connections label
(supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP
Module’s cover, if the cover is used.
Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the
control cabinet’s door.

Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and dataout connections from the VIP Module to the
control, using the connector cable supplied
with the VIP Module. These are the same
connections as for remote keypads.

3-28

Step

Action

Connect the module to the phone line as
shown below. See Figure 3-34.
4285/4286 Terminal

Connects to:

1. Phone In (Tip)

green wire of directconnect cord

2. Phone In (Ring)

red wire of directconnect cord

3. Phone Out (Tip)

brown wire of directconnect cord

4. Phone Out (Ring)

gray wire of directconnect cord

5. No Connection
6. Audio Out 1∗

Speaker

7. Audio Out 1∗

Speaker

∗Supported by the 4286 only

Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable
supplied with the control to make connections
to the VIP module. Make connections exactly
as shown in Figure 3-34. This is essential,
even if the system is not connected to a
central station. The 4285/4286 will not
function if this is not done.
• If touch-tones are not present following phone
access to the security system via an onpremises phone, try reversing the pair of
wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the
4285/4286.
• If the phone plug is disconnected from the
control, the premise’s phones will not operate.

Section 3 - Installing the Control
SPEAKER NOTE: IF CONNECTING SINGLE SPEAKER, USE 8-ohm
SPEAKER ONLY.
IF CONNECTING 2 SPEAKERS, USE 4-ohm OR
8-ohm SPEAKERS AND CONNECT IN SERIES.

GREEN

RED

RJ31X
JACK

CONTROL PANEL

CALLER
ID UNIT

BROWN

JACK
GRAY

MAIN
DIALER
JACK

INCOMING TELCO LINE

8-CONDUCTOR
DOUBLE PLUG CORD
(SUPPLIED)

4500
THERMOSTAT

RED

KEYED
HEADER

DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD

BROWN

RJ31X
JACK

TO CONTROL PANEL
KEYPAD CONNECTIONS

PREMISES
ANSWERING
MACHINE AND
PHONES
ANSWERING
MACHINE

YELLOW
NO CONNECTION
RED
BLACK
GREEN

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
EXISTING WIRES CONNECTED TO THE "HANDSET"
TERMINALS ON CONTROL MUST BE MOVED FROM
THERE TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ON THE 4286.
U.S. PATENT NO. 4791658

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC3USA-74659-KX-N
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B

4286_wiring-003-V0

GREEN

GRAY
BROWN
RED
GREEN

GRAY

NO CONNECTION

YELLOW

5 6 7

SPEAKER
VOLUME
CONTROL

1 2 3 4

NOTE:
4286 DEVICE
ADDRESS IS
SET TO "4".

GREEN

SEE SPEAKER NOTE

4286 VIP MODULE

Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections

Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) is not permitted
in UL installations.

UL
•
•

685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or
higher. Earlier versions will not hold the
phone line connection.
Contact ID code for “Listen-in to Follow” is
606. Contact ID is the only reporting format
that will send a “Listen-in to Follow.”

NOTES:
•
When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm
verification session is completed, all keypad sounds
are restored. Sirens are restored if the alarm
timeout period has not expired.
•
As part of its fail-safe software, the control limits
all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes.
This is because once the session begins, the AAV
Module controls the duration.
•
If a new Fire alarm should occur during a session,
the control breaks the phone connection and sends
the new Fire Alarm report, then re-triggers the
AAV Mode. All other dialer messages triggered
during ongoing conversation are held until either
the AAV Module signals that it is inactive, or the
15-minute timeout occurs.

To install the Eagle 1250 AAV module to the control,
perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, if this is not possible,
on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.

Connect the Eagle 1250 Module terminals 7
and 8 to the control’s zone 5 terminals 22
and 23.
The purpose of this connection is to silence
and restore the sounders at the premises. It
is also used to postpone noncritical dialer
reports while the AAV session is in progress.
Program zone 5 with a response type (e.g.,
10 Interior w/Delay). Field 1✴60 must be
enabled to silence sounders on the premises.
Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection
zone.

Connect the AAV module’s falling-edge
trigger input (terminal 5 on Eagle model
1250) to a 4204 relay module, as shown in
Figure 3-35.
Program the start and stop system operation
as 60 for the 4204 relay, in Output
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

If the phone plug is disconnected from the
control, the premise’s phones will not operate.

3-27

Section 3 - Installing the Control
PREMISES ANSWERING
MACHINE AND PHONES

RED
23

ZONE 5-

8-CONDUCTOR
DOUBLE PLUG
CORD
(SUPPLIED)

4204 RELAY MODULE

GND

BROWN

ZONE 5+

RJ31X
JACK
BROWN

7 8
GRAY

CALLER
ID UNIT

TO
CONTROL

GREEN

INCOMING TELCO LINE

4 5 6

MODEL EAGLE SECURITY
1241

REFER TO
AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR CONNECTIONS
TO AUDIO SPEAKERS
AND MICROPHONE

GRAY

▲

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ANSWERING
MACHINE

1 2 3

ALL SWITCHES OFF
EXCEPT SWITCH 5
(WHICH SHOULD BE ON)

13
14
15
16

V+
GND

JACK

RELAY 1
(SHOWN OFF)

CONTROL
PANEL
aav_conn-005-V0

NOTE

NO NC C
1 2
3

REMOVE ANY EOL RESISTOR
FROM CONTROL PANEL
TERMINALS 22 AND 23.

Figure 3-35: AAV Connections

Connecting the Transformer
Use the 1451 Transformer with enclosure (supplied)
with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control when
the PS24 Power Supply will not be used. This
transformer provides 18VAC/72VA secondary winding
for powering the control.
Use the 1451-24 Transformer when using both the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and the PS24 Power
Supply. This transformer provides 18VAC/72VA
secondary winding to power the control and
30VAC/188VA secondary winding to power the PS24
Power Supply.
The control panel kit you purchased comes with the
appropriate transformer. Both transformers have a
manually resettable circuit breaker mounted inside a
protective metal enclosure.
Use the following instructions for mounting and wiring
the 18VAC secondary winding of either transformer.
Use the instructions provided with the PS24 Power
Supply Module to wire the 30VAC winding of the 145124 Transformer.
To connect the 1451transformer to the control, perform
the following steps:
Step

Action

Remove the front cover of the enclosure.

Mount the enclosure to the wall near the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control
panel. The enclosure has 4 mounting holes
on its back surface for this purpose.

Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in
conduit. A dedicated circuit must be
used.

3-30

Step

Action

Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to
the transformer’s white and black primary
leads.

Connect the earth ground post on the back of
the enclosure to a good earth ground.

Run 16AWG wire in conduit from the
enclosure to the control panel.

Use wire nuts to splice the transformer blue
18VAC secondary leads to the 16AWG wire.
Connect the 16AWG wire at the control
panel to terminals 1 and 2.

Replace the front cover of the enclosure and
fasten it with the screws supplied
•
•

Use wires having insulation rated for at least
90°C operation and suitable for non-power
limited applications.
Use care to keep 18VAC wiring separated
from all other wiring inside the control panel’s
enclosure. This must be done by running
non-power-limited 18VAC wiring into the
control panel’s enclosure via one of the
knockouts on the left-hand side, and then tiewrapping these wires to the tie-wrap loops
located near the knockout.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

Earth Ground Connections
In order for the lightning transient protective devices in
this product to be effective, the designated earth ground
terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good
earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground
connection is #16 AWG, run no farther than 30 feet.

The panel requires the earth ground connection
for its lightning transient protection devices.

To connect the earth ground, perform the following
steps:
Step

Action

Connect the earth ground post inside the
1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use
grounding methods specified in the National
Electric Code).
Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire
to the ground post. The ground wire should
be the only wire under this nut.
Run a 16AWG wire from the ground post to
the panel’s earth ground terminal (30). Use
a second green nut (supplied) to secure this
wire to the ground post.
This connection avoids ground loops that
may occur when the 1451 and panel are
connected to different earth ground systems.

Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load
In the event of an AC power loss the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and the PS24 Power Supply
Module must be supported by backup, rechargeable
batteries. When the system is used without the PS24,
a 12VDC, 12AH to 34.4AH battery must be connected
the control panel. When the system is used with a
PS24, two 12VDC, 7AH to 17.2AH batteries must be
connected to the PS24.
The PS24 configures these batteries to provide 24V
backup power to its outputs and 12V backup power to
the control panel.
The battery’s capacity must be sized to provide 24 hours
(UL central station fire) or 60 hours (UL remote station
fire) of standby time followed by 5 minutes (fire only) or
15 minutes (fire and burglary) alarm time.

Use the worksheets that follow to calculate the total
current for Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, Bell
1, Bell 2, Polling Loop and the total current load of the
control panel. In each worksheet, multiply each device’s
standby and/or alarm current by the number of units
used.
Then, if you are using the PS24, fill out the Total
PS24 Module Load Worksheet, found in the PS24’s
instructions, to determine the required capacity of the
backup batteries that must be connected to the PS24.
Select two batteries from the Battery Selection Table in
the PS24’s instructions that have a capacity greater
than or equal to the calculated capacity.
If you are NOT using the PS24, fill out the Battery
Capacity Calculation Worksheet, following the other
worksheets below, to determine the required capacity
for the backup battery. Select a battery from the
Battery Selection Table (found later in this section) that
have a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated
capacity.

3-31

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
1.

In Worksheet 1, enter devices used on the polling
loop. Calculate total current draw on the polling
loop.

Worksheet 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw
Polling Loop Device

Current

# of Units

In Worksheet 3, enter devices used on Auxiliary
Power 2. Calculate standby and alarm currents,
then add to get Auxiliary Power 2 current subtotal.

Worksheet 3: Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load
Total

Total Current
Device
Model #

Device Current X
# of Units

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal
(pin 5 on keypad port 2)
Polling Loop Subtotal
(terminals 28 & 29 – 128mA) ✳

Alarm

400mA max.

1.7A max.

✳The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds
128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used. This
module is powered from the panel’s auxiliary power, and
provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an
additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of points
connected to the panel cannot exceed 119.

Standby

In Worksheet 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary
Power 1. Calculate standby and alarm currents,
then add to get Auxiliary Power 1 current subtotal.

In Worksheet 4, enter devices connected to the Bell
1 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get
the Bell 1 Output current subtotal.
Worksheet 4: Bell 1 Output Current Load
Total Current
Device
Model #

Device Current X
# of Units

Standby

XXXXXX

Worksheet 2: Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load
XXXXXX
Total Current
Device
Model #

Device Current X
# of Units

Standby

XXXXXX

Alarm

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Bell 1 Output Subtotal
(terminals 3 & 4 – 1.7A max.)

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal
(terminals 10 & 11)

3-32

1A max.

1.7A max.

Alarm

Section 3 - Installing the Control
5.

In Worksheet 5, enter devices connected to the Bell
2 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get
the Bell 2 Output current subtotal.
Worksheet 5: Bell 2 Output Current Load
Total Current
Device
Model #

Device Current X
# of Units

Standby

In Worksheet 6, enter the total calculated subtotals
of all listed outputs from Worksheets 1 through 5,
then add to get the combined current.

Worksheet 6: Total VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP
Current Load
Total Current

Alarm

Standby

Alarm

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP
PCB Current (Incl. 2-wire smoke
detector loading on zones 1 & 2)

300mA

470mA

5140DLM Backup Dialer Module

5mA
(inactive)

15mA
(active)

XXXXXX

Polling Loop Subtotal

XXXXXX

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

XXXXXX

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal

XXXXXX
Bell 1 Output Subtotal
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Bell 2 Output Subtotal
(terminals 5 & 6 – 1.7A max.)

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

Total Current Load
(1A max. standby; 2.3A max. alarm)
NOTE: The 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active.
However, since the control panel PCB current includes the
main dialer current, and since the main dialer is inactive when
the 5140DLM is active, the 5140DLM imposes only a 15mA
added load on the current supply.

•
•

If you are not using the PS24, the total control standby load must be limited to 1.27A for 24-hour standby
time, or to 510mA for 60-hour standby time using a 12V, 34.4AH battery connected to the control.
If you are using the PS24, skip the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet that follows and fill out the
worksheets found the PS24”s instructions instead. The total control panel standby load must be limited to
919mA for 24-hour standby time or 345mA for 60-hour standby time using two 12V, 17.2AH batteries
connected the PS24.

Determining the Size of the Standby Battery
For burglary installations requiring 4-hour standby
time followed by 15-minutes alarm time, use a 12AH
battery to support all loads up to and including the
maximum system load (e.g., 1.3A standby/2.8A alarm
total control panel load). For fire installations requiring
24-hour or 60-hour standby time, use the worksheet
below to calculate the required battery capacity.

Use Worksheet 7 to determine the required backup
battery capacity and use The Battery Selection Table to
determine the battery model number. A dual battery
harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be
wired in parallel for increased capacity.

DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid
type). These batteries require a different
charging voltage than is supplied by the panel.

3-33

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
7.

Using the total calculated from Worksheet 6,
calculate the battery capacity required for the
installation.

Connect the battery, referring to Figure 3-36.
The standby battery is automatically tested for
10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours
after exiting Programming mode. In addition,
entry into the Test mode initiates a battery test.
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP also runs
a 5-second battery test every 60 seconds to
check if the battery is connected.

Worksheet 7: Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet
Calculated
Value

Capacity

Formula

Standby
Capacity

Total standby current X 24 or 60
hours X 1.1 contingency factor.

Alarm
Capacity

Total alarm curr. X 0.083 (5 min)
or X 0.250 (15 min)

Total
Capacity

Add standby and alarm
capacities

Use the Battery Selection Table to select the
appropriate battery for the installation.

Battery Selection Table
Comment

7AH

Yuasa NP7-12

12AH

Yuasa NP12-12

Fits in large
mercantile
cabinet only.

14AH

Yuasa NP7-12

Connect two
in parallel.

17.2AH

Yuasa NPG18-12

Fits in large
mercantile
cabinet only.

NOTE: WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL:
- USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND
WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING.
- USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND
STATE OF CHARGE.
- USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY!
- IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED
AT SAME TIME, EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME
WEAK.
- AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED,
THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT
DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES.

BATTERY TABS

BLK

+ RED

DUAL
BATTERY
HARNESS
(2 PAIRS
SUPPLIED)

OBSERVE POPARITY!

MAIN PCB
BL

+
12V
BATTERY

Figure 3-36: Connecting the Backup Batteries

3-34

USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY
TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF
BATTERY HARNESSES (NOT
SUPPLIED) TO CONNECT ONE
OR TWO ADDITIONAL BATTERIES
IN PARALLEL.

AC
K

12V
BATTERY
(IF REQUIRED)

batt_conn-001-V0

Yuasa NP4-12

RE
D

Recommended Battery

4AH

BL
AC
K

Capacity

S E C T I O N

Programming
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Program Modes
The factory-loaded defaults (✳97) enable
keypad addresses 00-01 only. A keypad set to
one of these addresses must be used to
program the system initially.

There are two programming modes for the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP. These are the Data Field
Program Mode and the #93 Menu Mode. The Data Field
Program Mode is where many system options are
programmed. The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive
mode that require a 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160).

Local keypad programming can be disabled
through Compass downloading software. If this
is done, Program mode can only be accessed
via the downloading software.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode
Enter Programming mode using either method a or b:

Exit the Programming mode by either method a or b:

Press [✳] + [9] + [8]. Exiting by this method
prevents the installer code from being used to reenter Programming mode. Only method “a” can be
used to re-enter Programming mode.

Press [✳] + [9] + [9]. Exiting by this method
permits the installer code to be being used to reenter Programming mode.

Press both the [✳] and [#] keys at the same time
within 30 seconds after power is applied to the
control.
b. Enter the Installer Code + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0]
keys. The factory installer code can be changed
once in the Program mode (field ✳00).
NOTE: The default for the Installer Code is 5140.

Data Field Programming Mode
In the Data Field Program Mode you may access any
field simply by entering either [✳] or [#] + the field
number:
•

To write or change information in a field press [✳]
+ the field number (✳03).
•
To read the information in a field press [#] + the
field number (#03).
When the entries for a field are completed, the keypad
beeps three times and advances to the next field.
SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING
COMMANDS
✳91

Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

✳92

Display the software revision level of the control panel

✳93

Enter Menu mode programming

✳94

Go to next page of fields

✳99

Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming
Mode with no installer code lockout

✳98

Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another
The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to
as “pages”). The first page is accessed as soon as
Programming Mode is entered.
The second and third pages of data fields are indicated
at the keypad by a 1 and 2, respectively, in front of the
2-digit field address. “ALT PROGRAM MODE” is
displayed along with a “100”, “200” or “300,” indicating
which page of program fields is accessed.
To access the next level of programming fields:
1 Press ✳94.
2 Press [✳] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of
the program field, and make the desired entry.
NOTES:
Press ✳94 to move to 2nd page, (fields 1✳01 - 1✳76);
press ✳99 to move back to 1st page.
Press ✳94 to move to 3rd page (fields 2✳00 - 2✳88);
press ✳99 to move back to 2nd page.
Press ✳94 to move to 4th page, (fields 3✳00 - 3✳85);
press ✳99 to move back to 3rd page.

4-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Entry Errors
•
If an address is improperly entered, the keypad
displays “FC.”
•
If a program entry is improperly entered (for
example, a larger number than is permitted), the
keypad display will go blank.
In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✳] + the
correct field number and then enter the correct data.
Programming System-Wide Data Fields
Values for some programming fields are system-wide
(global), and some can be different for each partition
(partition-specific).
The partition-specific programming fields are
automatically skipped when programming the
global fields. If the system has only 1 partition,
the partition-specific fields are not automatically
skipped.

NOTE: If the number of digits that you enter in a data
field is fewer than the maximum permitted (for
example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last
entry and waits. To proceed, enter [✳] + the next data
field you wish to program.
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields
To program partition-specific data fields once in
Program Mode, do the following:
Step

Action

Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0
0.

Press ✳91, which will prompt you for the
partition number desired.

Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g.,
✳09) to begin programming.
When the first field’s entry is completed, the
next partition-specific field is automatically
displayed. When all partition-specific fields
are programmed, the system returns to the
global programming fields (page 1 fields).

Repeat this procedure for each partition in
the installation.

To program system-wide data fields, perform the
following steps:
Step

Action

Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 0.
The following display appears:
Program Mode
✳Fill # View – 00

If the control has not been programmed before,
enter ✳97 to load factory defaults.

Press [✳] and enter the first field number to be
programmed (for example, ✳00, Installers
Code). Make the desired entry. When the field
is complete, the keypad beeps three times and
advances to the next field. If you do not want to
change the next field, press [✳] and enter the
next field number to be programmed.
First Page of fields
(✳00 - ✳90)

NOTE: To return to the global program fields before
finishing all fields, enter any global field number.
Programming Partition-Specific Fields
Press ✳91 to select a partition.
↓
Enter the partition to be programmed.
↓
Enter a partition-specific field number and make entry.
↓
After partition-specific fields are programmed,
press ✳91 to select next partition.
Enter any global field number to return to the global
fields at any time.

To move to the next page of fields, press ✳94.
To return to the previous page, press ✳99.
4

Press ✳99 or ✳98 to exit Program Mode.

#93 Menu Mode Programming
The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode through
which much of the system’s programming is done. In
this mode, there are “question and answer” prompts
that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has
been entered. These prompts require a 2-line alpha
keypad (6139/6160).

4-2

After programming all system-related programming
fields in the usual way, press #93 while still in
programming mode to display the first choice of the
menu-driven programming functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1
(YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.
Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence.

Section 4 – Programming
Below are the main menu selections. For details refer to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Programming Guide.

MAIN MENU

OPTIONS

ZONE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO

EXPERT MODE?
1 = YES 0 = NO

For programming the following:
Zone Number
•
Zone Response Type
•
Partition Number for Zone
•
Dialer report code for zone
•
Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)
•
Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters & serial polling loop devices into the system.
•
Zone Attributes (e.g., Arm w/Fault, Silent, etc.).
•
Same as Zone Programming except:
Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.
•
Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.
•
NOTE: All the zone attributes cannot be programmed using the Expert Mode.

REPORT CODE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

For programming the following:
Alarm report codes for zones
•
Restore and supervisory codes
•
All other system report codes
•

ALPHA PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO

For entering alpha descriptors for the following:
Zone Descriptors
•
Installer’s Message
•
Custom Words
•
Partition Descriptors
•
Relay Descriptors
•

DEVICE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO

For defining output device functions.

OUTPUT PGM?
1 = YES 0 = NO

RLY VOICE DESCR?
1 = YES 0 = NO

CUSTOM INDEX ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 4285/4286 VIP Module.

For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module annunciation.
0

ACCESS POINT PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO

ACCESS GRP PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO

EVENT/ACTION PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO

For defining the following device characteristics for addressable devices, including keypads, RF receivers
(5881), output relay modules (4204/4204CF), FSA (FSA-8/FSA-24), 4285/4286 VIP Module, Panel Link
Module (VA8201), ECP long range radio (7845C), and VISTA Gateway Module:
Device Address
•
Device Type
•
Keypad Options (including Partition assignment)
•
RF House ID
•
LRR Options (including Programming radio)
•

For defining the parameters for each of the VistaKey zones, including which group(s) have access through
an access point (door). See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for detailed programming
instructions.
For defining the capabilities (privileges) for each group of users. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for detailed programming instructions.

For defining events and time windows for an access group. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for detailed programming instructions.

4-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
MAIN MENU

OPTIONS

SCHEDULED CHK-IN
1 = YES 0 = NO

For defining the schedule for the system to automatically call the downloader.
0

Following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode:

#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands
#93

Enters Menu Mode.

[✳]

Serves as [ENTER] key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#]

Backs up to previous screen.

Press to answer NO.

Press to answer YES.

00, or 000+[✳]

Quits Menu Mode and goes back to Data Field Programming Mode, if entered at first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Number Designations
The VISTA-128FBP supports up to 128 zones, the
VISTA-250FBP supports up to 250 zones, of hardwire,
polling loop and/or wireless protection, distributed
among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the
zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used
with each, and some alternate functions of the zones.
Zone

Function

1&2

2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)

Audio Alarm Verification (if used)

Cabinet Tamper/Ground Fault (if used)

Keyswitch (if used)

Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)

1-8

Traditional Hardwired Zones

1-250

5800 Series Wireless Devices

9-250

Polling Loop Devices

995

✳ + 1 Panic

996

# + 3 Panic

999

✳ + # Panic

Zone Index
The zones are designated as follows:
ZONE #
RANGE

ZONE
FUNCTION

ACTUAL ZONE

001 – 250

Protection
zones

As indicated

601 – 632

Relay
Supervisory
Zones

6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,
Relay Number 03, if supervised,
is zone 603.
NOTE: Relay supervision
should be used only for
relays on 4204CF modules.

800 – 830

ECP Device
Supervisory
Zones

8 + 2-digit Device Address;
e.g., Device Address 01, if
supervised, is zone 801.
4285/4286 VIP Module is zone
804 (because its Device
Address must be set to 4).

970-977,
988, 990, &
997

System
Supervisory
Zones

Zone #

Zone Type

Zone #

001

800-830

002

970

970:
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
988:

003

971-974

990:

004**

975

005

988 & 990

006

992*

N/A

007

995

008

996

010–250

997

601-632

999

Zone Defaults
Zone Type

NOTES:
* Zone 992 is the Duress zone. Programming of the zone
response type is not applicable. This zone requires only the
report code programming.
** Zone 004 is also defaulted with Auto-STAY enabled.

4-4

997:
992, 995 –
999

Duress and
Keypad Panics

Bell 1Output
Bell 2 Output
Earth Ground
J2 Input 1 (LRR)
Dialer 1
Dialer 2
Auxiliary Relay
J2 LRR Trigger Outputs
2nd Wireless Receiver –
not receiving signals
1st Wireless Receiver –
not receiving signals
Polling Loop (short
circuit)

992:

Duress

995:
996:

1 + ✳ panic (A key)
3 + # panic (C key)

999:
✳ + # panic (B key)
Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 05
(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night) or 19 (24-Hour Trouble).

Section 4 – Programming
Communication Defaults
*45 PRIMARY FORMAT
[1] ADEMCO Contact ID
*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Prim) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed
*47 SECONDARY FORMAT
[1] ADEMCO Contact ID
*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed
*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0]
[0]
*50

No checksum

Primary

SESCOA/RADIONICS SEL.

[0] Radionics

*51
*52

DUAL REPORTING
[0] no
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
[0]
[0]
[0]
[0]
[0] [0]
standard
Alarm Rstr

*53

Secondary

Bypass

Trbl

Opn/Cls Low Bat

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
[0]
[0]
[0]
[0]
[0] [0]
standard
Alarm Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

Opn/Cls Low Bat

Communication Defaults for Zones
ZONE #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53

1st
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106

1st
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159

1st
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212

1st
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

4-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Communication Defaults for Zones (continued)
ZONE #
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226

1st
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239

1st
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
601-632
800-830

1st
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
00
00

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

ZONE #
970
988
990
992 (DURESS)
995
996
997
999
ALARM RST.
TROUBLE
TRBLE. RST
BYPASS
BYP. RST.

1st
00
00
00
11
00
00
06
60
01
01
01
00
00

2nd
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

Zone Response Type Definitions
Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines
the way in which the system responds to faults in that
zone. There are three keypad-activated zones (panic
keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop
supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two
for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined
below.
Type 00: Zone Not Used
Program with this zone type if the zone is not used.
Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary
Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and
the system is armed in the AWAY or STAY mode. When
the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM
mode, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay begins
whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming
mode selected. These delays are programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for primary
entry to and exit from the facility.
Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary
Provides a secondary entry delay, if the system is
armed in the AWAY or STAY modes and the zone is
faulted. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or
MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided.
Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is
armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These
delays are programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry
and exit of the facility and require more time than the
primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone
type must be greater than those for zone type 01 (e.g., a
garage, loading dock, or basement door).
Type 03: Perimeter Burglary
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or
MAXIMUM mode.
Assign this zone type to all exterior doors and windows.

4-6

Type 04: Interior, Follower
Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry
delay time) if an entry/exit zone is faulted first.
Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active
when the system is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM
mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry
delay.
If the Interior Follower zone is programmed for one of
the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is
automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the
STAY or INSTANT mode.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as
a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass
upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or
MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the
system annunciates a latched trouble sounding from
the keypad (and a central station report, if desired).
Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foilprotected door or window (such as in a store), or to a
zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room or
drug supply room. It can also be used on a zone in an
area where immediate notification of an entry is
desired.
Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm
Sends a report to the central station but provides no
keypad display or sounding. Assign this zone type to a
zone containing an Emergency button.
Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm
Sends a report to the central station and provides an
alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external
alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an
Emergency button.
Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm
Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm
sound at the keypad only. (No other Notification
Appliance Circuit is activated.) Assign this zone
type to a zone an Emergency button or one containing
monitoring devices such as water sensors or
temperature sensors.

Section 4 – Programming
Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)
Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble
condition on open circuit. A fire alarm produces a
pulsing of the Notification Appliance Circuit. A zone of
this type is always active and cannot be bypassed.
Type 10: Interior with Delay
Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed
entry and exit delay times) when armed in the AWAY
mode. Provides only exit delay when armed in the
MAXIMUM mode (no entry delay).
If the Interior with Delay zone is programmed for one of
the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is
automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the
STAY or INSTANT mode. Delay begins whenever
sensors in this zone are violated, regardless of whether
or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as
a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass
upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 14: PLM Supervision
Provides supervision of remote Panel Link Modules. If
the communication between the local PLM and a
remote PLM fails, a trouble message is produced for the
PLM zone.
Type 16: Fire With Verification
Provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble
condition on open circuit. An initial short causes 7second smoke detector power reset. Any subsequent
short within 90 seconds causes a fire alarm. A fire
alarm produces a pulsing of the Notification Appliance
Circuit. A zone of this type is always active and cannot
be bypassed.

Type 19: 24-Hour Trouble
Provides a trouble response on a short or open circuit.
No alarm sounders are activated.
Type 20: Arm-STAY (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the
zone is activated.
Type 21: Arm-AWAY (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the
zone is activated.
Type 22: Disarm (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to disarm when the zone is
activated.
Type 23: No Alarm Response
Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired,
but with no accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door
access).
Type 27: Access Point
Assign this zone type to an input device (hardwired
zone, wireless zone, keypad, access control relay, etc.)
that controls an access entry point (e.g., a door). The
access point entry relay can be assigned to an access
control relay (controlled by the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP), ECP relay (4204), or to the access control
system independent of the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP.
Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision
Used to supervise the MLB. If communication between
the MLB and the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM) fails,
a trouble condition is annunciated for the zone. Also, if
the communication fails, all access control system
(ACS) input zones also display a “CHECK.”
Type 29: Momentary Exit
Used to cause an access point programmed for entry to
revert to an exit point for 15 seconds. After the 15
seconds, it automatically reverts back to an entry point.
Use this zone type only with VistaKey modules.

Type 17: Fire Waterflow
Provides a trouble condition on open circuit and an
alarm on a short circuit that remains longer than the
programmed time delay (fields 3✳16 and 3✳18). The
alarm can be silenced by either an entry of User Code
+ OFF or when the zone restores (field 3✳14). This type
is always active and can only be bypassed by the
Installer code or the Master code, (field 3✳85).

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the same
zone response type for all 8 partitions, but panics may be
individually enabled for each partition.

Type 18: Fire Supervisory
Provides a supervisory response on a short circuit. Open
circuit can be programmed for either a trouble or
supervisory response (field 3✳13). This type is always
active and can only be bypassed by the Installer code or
the Master code, (field 3✳85).

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION
Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990, and 997) report as
trouble conditions only, and as such, should be assigned zone
type 19 if annunciation is desired. See Polling Loop Supervision
and RF System Operation and Supervision in SECTION 3:
Installing the Control for more information.

Zone Input Type Definitions
Each zone must be assigned an input type, which
defines the where the system will “look” for status of
the zone (RF receiver, polling loop, etc.). Zone input
types are defined below.
Type 01 Hardwired (HW)
Reserved for the built-in hardwired zones 1-9.

Type 02 RF Motion (RM)
Select for 5800 Series transmitters. Sends periodic
check-in signals, fault and low-battery signals. The
control panel automatically restores the zone to “ready”
after a few seconds. This type is designed for facilities
with multiple motion detectors that may fault and
restore simultaneously. The transmitter must remain
within the receiver’s range.
NOTE: If using RF Motion with a door/window type
transmitter, only loop 1 may be used.

4-7

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Type 03 Supervised RF (RF)
Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will be
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter must
remain within the receiver’s range.
Type 04 Unsupervised RF (UR)
Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will not be
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter may
therefore be carried off-premises.
Type 05 Unsupervised Button RF (BR)
Select for 5800 Series transmitters specifically designed
for this input type. These transmitters send only fault
signals. They do not send low-battery signals until they
are activated. The transmitter may be carried offpremises.
Type 06 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL)
Use for V-Plex devices with a built-in serial number.
For VistaKey, select this type for Door Status Monitor
Backup DSMB. If local power to the VistaKey is lost, a
V-Plex SIM, located on the VistaKey board, is powered
directly from the polling loop and reports the state of
the DSM via the standard V-Plex polling system.
NOTE: To obtain the DSMB function, the Input Type
must be defined as 06 and the next prompt in Zone
Programming (Access Point) must contain the Access
Point number (01-15) (address of the VistaKey module).
Type 07 DIP Switch Loop (DP)
Select for polling loop devices that use DIP switches for
programming the zone number of the device.

Type 08 Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS)
Select for the second loop of two-zone polling loop
devices (e.g., 4190WH; 4278).
Type 09 Console Input (CS)
Select when this zone is to be controlled by a keypad
input (user code + [#] + [7] + [3]) for access control.
Type 10 PassPoint Access Control (ACS)
Select when this zone is mapped to a zone on the
PassPoint Access Control System.
Type11 VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM)
Select this input type when using a VistaKey module
connected to a door. This must be programmed for each
VistaKey module to provide the DSM zone mapping a
panel zone. If this is not programmed the panel will not
“see” the VistaKey module.
It is also used to determine the door is opened after a
card swipe or if the door is being held open. The device
is normally a magnetic switch mounted on the door.
The status of the switch is different when the door is in
an open position.
Type 12 VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE)
Use this input type to map an uncommitted RTE zone
to an alarm panel zone. This input type is not normally
used if the zone is used for a request-to-exit function.
Type 13 VistaKey General Purpose (GP)
This input type operates in the same manner as other
alarm panel zones and is provided so that a zone in the
proximity of the VistaKey can be wired without having
to run additional wiring from the control panel.

Programming for Panel Linking
Step

Action

Step

Action

Program the Panel Link Module (PLM) into
the system in Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode with Device Type 10.

If you want to supervise the PLM, program
zone 8xx with response type 05, where “xx” =
the module’s address. If you want the zone to
report to the central station, make sure the
report code for the zone is set with a non-zero
value.

To supervise the PLMs connected to
other controls, program those modules in
Zone Programming with response type 14.
Also, program the panel ID number. The ID
number must match the ID number
programmed in Device Programming of the
control panel the PLM is connected. To report
to the central station, program the report code
for the zone is set with a non-zero value. Be
sure to program the input type with 00.

See Device Programming and Zone Programming in #93
Menu Mode in the Programming Guide for a detailed
explanation of the programming procedures.

Programming for the Alpha Pager Module
•
•

•
•

4-8

In field 2*30, enter 1 to enable the Alpha Pager
Module.
Program fields 2*31 – 2*88 for the paging service
parameters (see the Programming Guide). The
events (e.g., field 2*39) must be programmed
for the pager to work.
In field *14, enter 1 to enable the RS232 input (J2
Pin 5).
In field 3*19, enter 1 to enable the RS232 input (J2
Pin 5).

•

If you have a printer connected to the module,
program field 1*69 with a 0 for a parallel printer or
a 1 for a serial printer.
Additionally, field 05 may be programmed when
using the Alpha Pager Module.
Fields for programming the delay times (e.g.
2*36 and 2*37 for pager 1) are relevant only
when using numeric format for the pager.

Section 4 – Programming

Programming for Access Control
VistaKey
See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for
the detailed programming instructions.

VistaKey Dialer Enables
When the VistaKey is installed with an alarm system,
the system defaults are set so that the system does not
send reports to the central station. The programming is
accomplished in field 1∗35 for the following events:
•
ACS Troubles - To enable or disable ACS trouble
reporting.
•
ACS Bypasses - To enable or disable ACS bypass
reporting.
•
ACS System - To enable or disable ACS system
reporting, (i.e., ACS module reset).
•
ACS Alarms - To enable or disable ACS alarm
reporting.
•
Dialer (Trace) - To enable or disable access
grant/denial events sent to the central station.
The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for
use as regular control panel hardwired zones (the zone
response type is ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also
utilize the control panel dialer for reports to the central
station.

Using ACS Zone Inputs
If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these
may be used by the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP as
hardwired zones. To program for ACS zone inputs,
perform the following steps:
Step
Action

Using the Alpha Keypad
Step

Action

Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.

Program the zone with a response type 27
(Access Point).

Enter the access point number (00-31) of the
door.

Program whether this is an entry or exit point.

Enter the partition number.

Enter the input type as CS (09).

7
Enter the keypad ECP address.
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
Using an RF Transmitter Zone
A button type RF transmitter (5804) can be used to
provide access or egress for up to 4 doors. One button
will control one door. Also, a button can be used to
provide access or egress due to a panic or duress
condition.
An RF transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote
switch to provide exit in case of a fire alarm using a
PassPoint event action.
To program the RF transmitter for access control,
perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1

Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.

Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate
the input type as ACS (10).

Program the zone with a response type 27
(Access Point).

Enter the access point number (00-31) of the
door.

Indicate whether RF device is for entry or exit.

Enter the partition number

Enter the input type: button RF (05).

Enter the loop number.

3
Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31)
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
PassPoint Dialer Events
All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP dialer via the VGM. These
events will also be logged into the control’s event log.
This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the PassPoint
ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.
Programming the VISTA Gateway Module
See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the
VISTA Gateway Module.
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using VistaKey
or PassPoint
The control can send entry and exit requests to the
VistaKey or PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads and
button-type (BR) RF transmitters. A zone is
programmed with a response type 27 (Access Point) and
an appropriate input type (console, RF).

8
Enroll the serial number
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
•

•

RF buttons and pendants must be assigned
to a user number in order to function. See
the SECTION 9: User Access Codes for the
procedure.
An RF transmitter will not provide access or
grant if the system is in any test mode.

4-9

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Using Wireless Keypads
Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another
way of entering or exiting the premises. They function
the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73
is entered. This entry will allow momentary access to
ALL access points in the partition to which the keypad
is assigned To program the wireless keypad, enter the
partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1*48.

Using the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP for StandAlone Access Control
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be used for
access control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS or
VistaKey. A user can trigger an access point (i.e., door
strike) for 2 seconds by entering User Code + [0].
To program the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP for
Stand-Alone access control, perform the following steps:

Control of Lighting and Appliances
Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an
access or exit event occurs. Lights or appliances can be
automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or
egress request is presented at an access point. To
control these devices, the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP relays or the ACS relays or triggers are used
with keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response
type is Access Point (27).
To program the control of lighting and appliances,
perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.

Program all the information for the relay.

Select the output type: ECP (1) (4204/4204CF).

Step

Action

Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.

Program the output type as 1, or 2.

For type 1, program the ECP address and
relay number.

For type 2, program the house and unit codes.

Program the relay number in field 1∗76
(partition-specific).

See Output Programming in the Programming Guide
for a detailed explanation.

Programming for ECP Long Range Radio
•
•
•

Program the LRR in Device Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode Programming.
Program field ✳56: Selects the time the panel
should wait before it attempts to send a message to
the second destination..
Program field ✳57: Selects the initial reporting
destination for messages.

•
•

Program field ✳58: Selects events for the primary
sub’s ID
Program field ✳59: Selects events for the secondary
sub’s ID.

Programming for the Event Log
•
•
•

Program field 1✳70 Event Log Types (1=enable;
0=disable for each type)
Program field 1✳71 12/24-Hour Time Stamp
Format (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr)
Program field 1✳72 Event Log Printer On-line
(0=disable; 1=enable)

4-10

•
•

Program field 1✳73 Printer Baud Rate (1=300;
0=1200)
Program Event Log Report Codes System Group
#2 in the #93 Menu Mode.

S E C T I O N

Data Field Descriptions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

About Data Field Programming
The following pages list this control’s data fields in numerical order. Field numbers are listed in the left column, followed
by a “Title and Data Entries column, which lists the valid entries for each field. Experienced installers can simply follow
this column when programming the data fields. The “Explanation” column provides explanatory information and special
notes where applicable.
NOTE: Refer to the Programming Guide for the default values. They are not listed in this section.

Use the Programming Guide to record the data for this installation.

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Programming Data Fields
Data field programming involves making the appropriate entries for each of the data fields. Start Data Field
programming by entering the installer code + 8 + 0 + 0 + 0.

FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*00

Installer Code

The Installer Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use.
This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the
keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it isn’t used to arm
the system. This code cannot be used to re-enter Program Mode if Program
Mode is exited by the *98 command.

*04

Enable Random Timers For
Partitions 1-8

Enter 4 digits, 0-9

0 = disable
1 = enable

*05

System Events Notify

*06

Quick Exit (partition-specific)

*08

Temporal Siren Pulse

0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, the activation time of the window is randomized up to 30 minutes
and is initialized by either of two methods:
User Code + [#] + [41]Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the
partition.
User Code + [#] + [42]Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the
partition with a time window within 6 PM and 5 AM.
If enabled the system sends notification messages via the RS232 port on the
J2 triggers to interface with Home Control type software. Field 3*19 must be
set for RS232 (1).
NOTE: If enabled, the system also sends fault and restore messages via the
RS232 port.
If enabled, allows users to exit the armed partition without disarming and then
rearming the partition.
Quick Exit is initiated by entering [#] + [9]. This restarts the exit delay. All rules
of exit apply, including exit error logic.
If enabled, the pulse rate for an output programmed for pulsing (field 3✳15)
will be three dings and a pause, repeated. If disabled, the pulse rate will be
one second on, one second off.

5-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*09

Entry Delay #1 (partition-specific)

Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re-enter the premises
through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm
the system without sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within
this period or an alarm will occur.
NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. The entry
delay time and Burg Alarm Comm Delay (field *88) combined cannot exceed 1
minute for SIA installations.

*10

*11

*12

*13

*14

Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.

Exit Delay #1 (partition-specific)
Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.

Entry Delay #2 (partition-specific)
Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.

Exit Delay #2 (partition-specific)
Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.

Bell 1 Timeout
Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.
00 = no timeout.

Trigger or RS232 Input
0 = trigger
1 = RS232 input

UL
*15

*16

Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than
those assigned to Entry Delay #1.
NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. The entry
delay time and Burg Alarm Comm Delay (field *88) combined cannot exceed 1
minute for SIA installations.
Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those
assigned to Exit Delay #1.
NOTE: The delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL installations. The delay
must be set for a minimum 45 seconds for SIA installations.
Defines the length of time the Bell 1 Output and the keypad’s sounder will
sound for all audible alarms.
Must be minimum 16 minutes for UL Commercial Burglary installations. Must
be minimum 6 minutes for UL Commercial Fire and SIA installations.
Select if J2 Pin 5 should be set Fire Alarm trigger output or as an RS232
input. If set for RS232, this enables the system to receive serial data (75
baud).

Using the RS232 input for automation is not permitted in UL installations.

Keyswitch Assignment
Enter 1-8 partition keyswitch is being used.
Enter 9 if the keyswitch is being used to
silence fire Notification Appliance Circuits in
the event of a fire alarm.
Enter 0 if the keyswitch is not used.

Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming
Ding (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

*17

AC Loss Keypad Sounding

*19

Randomize AC Loss Report

*20

VIP Module Phone Code

5-2

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises
through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after
arming the system without setting off the alarm.
NOTE: The delay must be set for a minimum 45 seconds for SIA installations.

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = disable
1 = randomize for 10-40 min. after AC Loss
2 = randomize for 6-12 hours after AC Loss

1-9 = first digit of access code
∗ or # = second digit of access code (enter #
+11 for “∗”, or # +12 for “#”)
st
To disable enter 00 for the 1 digit

The keyswitch requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer
available as protection zone). The fire and panic alarm voltage triggers (J2)
automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for the Keyswitch
LEDs.
Openings/closing report as user “0” if enabled in field *40.
If enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of
exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).
Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.

If enabled, sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) occurs when AC power is
lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

If disabled, AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss.
Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the
central station during a community blackout.

If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used
to access the system.
Must be disabled for UL installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*22

Keypad Panic Enables (partitionspecific)

If enabled, the keypad panics (zones 995, 996, and 999) may be used in this
partition. There are 3 entries in this field, one for each panic.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*23

Multiple Alarms (partitionspecific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, allows more than one alarm sounding for a given zone during an
armed period.
NOTE: that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than
allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This has no impact on
the number of communication messages transmitted.
Must be 1 for UL installations.

*24

Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper
0 = disable (tamper detection)
1 = enable (no tamper detection)

If disabled, the system monitors the tampers on expansion zones.
NOTE: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or
5800 Series transmitters.
Must be 0 for UL installations.

*25

Burglary Trigger for Response
Type 8

If enabled, allows triggering of the voltage output 3 on Pin 3 of the J2 header
to include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).

0 = disable
1 = enable

*26

Intelligent Test Report

*27

Test Report Interval

*28

Power-Up in Previous State

*29

Quick Arm (partition-specific)

*30

Main Dialer TouchTone or Rotary
Dial

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0001-9999 for the test report interval in
hours.
Enter 0000 for test reporting.

0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, no test report is sent if any other type of report was sent since the
last test report.
If disabled, test reports are sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or
not any other report has been sent.
Must be 0 for UL applications.
If a test report is desired, enter a test code in Report Code Programming in
#93 Menu Mode. Set first test report time in field *83.
Maximum Test report interval is 0024 for UL commercial installations.
If enabled, the system, upon power-up, reverts to its status prior to a complete
power loss.
If disabled, the system always powers up in a disarmed state.
NOTE: Neither authority level 0 nor 5 can be used to disarm the system if the
control powers up armed.
Must be 1 for UL applications.
If enabled, allows arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT,
or MAXIMUM mode by using the [#] key instead of the user code.
NOTES:
When armed, the system reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for
User #2 (typically a Master level user) was enabled for a given partition.
If Quick Arm is used, the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot
disarm the system.
Select the dialing method for the main dialer.

0 = rotary
1 = touchtone
If you select TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service. Note that
whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling
(ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for TouchTone w/Rotary backup

*31

PABX Access Code

*32

Primary Subscriber’s Account
Number (partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers representing the prefix
needed to obtain an outside telco line. If not required, enter nothing and
proceed to next field.
Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account
number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data
only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.

5-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*33

Primary Phone Number

Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits. This is the
phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to
the central station. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is
entered.

*34

*35

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

Secondary Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

Download Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

*36

Download ID Number

*37

Download Command Enables

*38

Prevent Zone XXX Bypass
(partition-specific)

*39

Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:
00=0 01=1 02=2 03=3 04=4 05=5
06=6 07=7 08=8 09=9 10=A 11=B
12=C 13=D 14=E 15=F

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits. The secondary phone
number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if
split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account number
(field *90) must also be programmed.
Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits. Do not fill unused
spaces.
NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.
Enter eight digits.
NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.

Enabling a function means that you are able to perform that function via the
ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.
Functions are as follows: Dialer Shutdown; System Shutdown; Not Used;
Remote Bypass; Remote Disarm; Remote Arm; Upload Program; Download
Program.
For UL commercial burglary and fire installations, all entries must be 0.

Enter a zone number (001-250).
Enter 000 if all zones can be bypassed.

Enter three digits for zone that cannot be bypassed by the user.
NOTES:
The actions manual bypass, group bypass, auto-stay, and STAY/INSTANT
arming modes cannot bypass any zone programmed in this field.
The system will not arm if the zone is programmed with the vent zone or force
arm fault attributes.

Enable Open/Close Report for
Installer Code (partition-specific)

If enabled, whenever the Installer Code is used to arm or disarm the partition,
an open/close report is sent to the central station.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*40

Enable Open/Close report for
Keyswitch

If enabled, whenever the keyswitch is used to arm or disarm the partition, an
open/close report is sent to the central station.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*41

Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones
3-8)
0 = disable
1 = enable

*42

*43

5-4

Dial Tone Pause
Enter the wait time for dial tone detection:
0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; 2 = 30
seconds.

Dial Tone Detection
0 = disable
1 = enable

If disabled, end-of-line resistors must be used on zones 3-8.
If enabled end-of-line resistors cannot be used and only normally closed
devices must be used.
Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
Enter the time the system waits for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true dial
tone is not selected in field *43.
Must be 0 for UL installations.

If enabled, the system waits for true dial tone. If no dial tone is detected,
control dials at end of pause programmed in field *42.
If disabled, the system pauses for seconds entered in field *42, then dials.
NOTE: Disabling may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks
where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*44

Ring Detection Count

Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-initiated
downloading will be used.
NOTES:
Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.
In the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once,
then hang up, and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing
one ring followed by nothing, does not answer the first call, but readies itself to
pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30
seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).
Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

*45

Enter 00 to disable ring detection.
Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.
Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat
Mode

Primary Format

*46

Low Speed Format (Primary)

*47

Secondary Format

Enter the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Low Speed Format (Secondary)

*49

Checksum Verification

*50

Sescoa/Radionics Select

*51

Dual Reporting

*52

Standard/Expanded Reporting
Primary

Enter the low speed format for the secondary telephone number.

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics

Enter 2 digits, one for the primary and one
for the secondary.
0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = disable
1 = enable

Standard/Expanded Reporting
Secondary
0 = disable
1 = enable

*54

Enter the low speed format for the primary telephone number.

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics

*48

*53

Enter the reporting format for the primary telephone number.

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Unattended Mode
0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, the system for either or both primary/secondary formats sends a
verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send
two message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.

If disabled, selects Radionics, which uses hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.
If enabled, selects Sescoa, which uses only numeric reporting (0-9).
NOTE: The selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.
If enabled, all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone
numbers.
NOTE: If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both primary
and secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If used
with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both, open/close and test
messages go to secondary only, while all other reports go to primary. If used
with Split Reporting option 3, fire alarms and supervisory reports go to
primary, all other reports go to secondary.
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
primary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *45.
NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
secondary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *47.
NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
If enabled, the system automatically calls the downloader at programmed
intervals.
NOTE: The following fields must be programmed first: primary subscriber
account number – field *32; primary phone number – field *33; downloader
phone number – field *35. Or you can go into the Unattended Program Mode,
from normal operating mode, by entering Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [9].

5-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*56

Dynamic Signaling Delay

Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first
reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination (first and second destinations are determined in field ✳57).
NOTE: If the acknowledgment is received before the delay time expires, no
message is sent to the second destination.

*57

Dynamic Signaling Priority

*58

Long Range Radio Central
Station #1 Category Enable

Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*59

Select the initial reporting path for central station messages.

0 = Primary Dialer
1 = Long Range Radio

Long Range Radio Central
Station #2 Category Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable

*77

Auto Trouble Restore

*79

Zone Type Restores for Zone
Types 1-8

0 = disable
1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the primary subscriber ID of
the Long Range Radio.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the secondary subscriber ID
of the Long Range Radio.

If enabled, each trouble and supervisory condition automatically clears the
keypad display and stops the keypad beeping when the zone returns to a
“ready/normal” state. This applies to ALL trouble and supervisory types. The
system also sends the Trouble/Supervisory Restore report to the central
station, if programmed.
If a partition has more than one trouble/supervisory condition present at the
same time, the system automatically clears the keypad display of each zone
as it restores, but the keypad continues to beep until all the zones restore.
This field has eight entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
will send Restore reports.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*80

Zone Type Restores for Zone
Types 9 & 10

This field has two entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
will send Restore reports.

0 = disable
1 = enable

*83

*84

First Test Report Time
Enter 00-07the for day (01 = Monday)
Enter 00-23 for the hour
Enter 00-59 for the minutes

Swinger Suppression (partitionspecific)
Enter 01-15.
Enter 00 for unlimited reports

*85

*87

5-6

Enter the day and time that the first Test report shall be transmitted. Enter 00
in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting. Enter
00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the
time that is set.
This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a
specific zone in an armed period. The system automatically resets the
shutdown for a zone after 48 hours if there are no trips on any zone.
Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

0 = disable
1 = enable

This field has four entries as follows: Zone 995, 996, 999, Duress Enable for
each partition that the panics and duress reporting is desired.
NOTE: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to
enable Duress reporting.

Entry Warning (partition-specific)

Select the type of warning for the entry delay period.

Enable Dialer Reports for Panics
& Duress (partition-specific)

0 = 3 short beeps
1 = slow continuous beeps

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

*88

Burglary Alarm Communicator
Delay (partition-specific)

Select the delay, if any, for burglary alarm communications.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
Must be 1 for SIA installations.

0 = no delay
1 = 30-second delay

*89

Restore Report Timing

*90

Secondary Subscriber Account
Number (partition-specific)

0 = instant
1 = after bell timeout
2 = when system is disarmed

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

1*15

Cancel Verify

1*17

Lobby Partition

1*18

Affects Lobby (partition-specific)

1*19

Arms Lobby (partition-specific)

1*20

Exit Error Logic Enable

0 = disable
1 = enable

Select the time when restore reports are sent after an alarm.
Must be 2 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account
number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data
only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.
NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used
(field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary account
number.
If enabled, the system pulses the alarm output three times and displays
“Cancel Sent to Central Station” when it receives a kissoff of a Cancel report.
This message can only be cleared by entering the code + off. Enter 0 to
disable.
NOTE: Field 1✳52 determines when a Cancel report is sent to the central
station.
Select the Common Lobby Partition.

0 = none
1-8 = partition number

0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, causes lobby partition to disarm when this partition disarms.
NOTE: This partition must be armed before lobby can be armed.

If enabled, arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the lobby
partition. Field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).
NOTES:
The lobby cannot be armed unless all partitions programmed for “affect” (field
1*18) is already armed.
If this field is enabled, Field 1*18 for this partition must also be enabled.
If enabled, the system at the end of exit delay, if an entry door or an interior
zone is left open, starts the entry delay period, and activates the Notification
Appliance Circuit(s), and keypad sounders for the duration of entry delay.
This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the system
before exit error occurs.
If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system
bypasses the faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system
is armed. Also, the following dialer reports are sent to the central station if
programmed:
Exit Error by User (not sent when is using ADEMCO High Speed format);
Entry/Exit or Interior Alarm with the zone number;
Bypass reports.
NOTE: This field must be enabled for SIA installations

Exit Error Logic is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).

5-7

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

1*21

Exit Delay Reset

If enabled, when the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the
user exits, closes the door and then re-enters the premises, the exit delay
time is reset to the programmed value.
NOTES:
Exit Delay Reset is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to
retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm.
This feature may only be activated once after arming. The Exit Delay must be
enabled for SIA installations.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Exit Delay Reset is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).

Cross-Zoning

Cross Zoning is not suitable for use in a UL installation.

Cross Zoning is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5-minute period of each other to cause
an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones from causing an alarm condition. You can
select four "sets" of cross-zones (programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25), keeping in mind the following:
•
Both zones in each set must protect the same area.
•
Both zones in each set must be in the same partition.
•
A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area (see warning below).
DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. Cross a fire zone with another fire
zone only, and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). Consult
NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements. We recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no
farther than 30 ft.

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation
•

In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a fault on the second zone
causes an alarm immediately.
If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-zoning feature does not apply.
If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the entry/exit zone as the first zone of the
pair. This ensures that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.
If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay activates without the other zone being faulted.
If a relay is programmed to activate on an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip before the relay activates, and both
zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).

•
•
•
•

If the one of the zones trips and the second zone does not trip within the 5-minute period, an “error” message is
reported to the central station. The Contact ID event code is 378.

FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

1*22

Cross Zoning Pair One

Select the first pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a fiveminute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

1*23

Cross Zoning Pair Two

1*24

Cross Zoning Pair Three

1*25

Cross Zoning Pair Four

5-8

Enter 001-250
Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the second pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.
Select the third pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a fiveminute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.
Select the fourth pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a fiveminute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

1*26

Panic Button or Speedkey

Select for the A, B, and C keys whether the system performs a panic or a
speedkey function when the key is pressed.
Select for the D key whether the system performs a specific macro or if the
user will select a macro when the key is pressed.
Instead of the 32 programmable speedkey functions the keys can be
programmed for 3 other functions as follows:
33 = fire sounder silence. The key, when pressed, silences fire alarms.
34 = display next fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad to
display the next fire alarm in the system.
35 = display previous fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad
to display the previous fire alarm in the system.
NOTE: Selection 33 functions when field 3✳15 is enabled for pulsing.
Selections 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with Fire Display Lock
(field 3✳01).
NOTE: If a user code with global arm/disarm is used to execute the macro,
the user’s global capabilities will override any arm/disarm commands in the
macro sequence.

For A, B, C keys:
00 = panic function
01-35 = macro number
For D key:
00 = to select a macro to execute when key
is pressed
01-35 = macro number

1*28

RF Transmitter Low Battery
Sound
0 = disarmed state only
1 = both armed and disarmed states

1*29

RF Transmitter Low Battery
Reporting
0 = disable
1 = enable

1*30

RF Receiver Supervision Checkin Interval
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
00 = disable receiver supervision.

Select when the RF transmitter low-battery condition should display and
audible beep annunciate on the keypad.
Must be 1 for UL installations.

If enabled, the system sends a Trouble message for RF transmitter lowbattery condition to the central station.
NOTE: The Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure,
independent of this selection.
Must be 1 for UL installations.
Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF receiver(s).
Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered results in
the activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first
receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related
communication reports.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
00 = disable transmitter supervision.

Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF transmitters.
Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time
entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.

1*33

TouchTone with Rotary Backup

If enabled, the system reverts to rotary dialing if communicator is not
successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.

1*34

Communicator Split Reporting

1*35

Access Control Dialer Enables

1*31

RF Transmitter Check-in Interval

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = Split Reporting disabled
1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore, and Cancel
reports to primary, all others to secondary
2 = Open/Close and Test reports to
secondary, all other reports to primary
3 = Fire Alarms and Fire Restores to
primary, all others to secondary

0 = disable
1 = enable

Select the type of split reporting for system communication.
NOTE: See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.

There are six entries for this field as follows: Trace, Trouble, Not Used,
Bypass, System, Alarm.
If Trace is enabled, access grant/denial events sent to the central station.
For the other events, if enabled, a report is sent to the central station.

5-9

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

1*42

Call Waiting Defeat

If enabled, the system defeats Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to
both the primary and secondary numbers.
NOTES:
After the panel's initial call to report the alarm, the panel may attempt to make
an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral. If Call Waiting is
not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to contact the
premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) hears the phone ringing
indefinitely and must to dispatch on the call.
DO NOT enable this feature unless Call Waiting is being used.

1*43

Permanent Keypad Display
Backlighting (partition-specific)

0 = disable
1 = enable

1*44

Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect

1*45

Exit Delay Sounding (partitionspecific)

0 = disable
1 = enable

1*47

Chime on Bell 1 (partitionspecific)

If enabled, backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.
Otherwise the backlighting comes on when a key is pressed.
NOTE: When a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in
that partition.
If enabled, when more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid
sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel disables the wireless keypad.
The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired
keypad.
If enabled, the system produces slow beeping from the keypads during exit
delay and reverts to rapid beeping during the last 10 seconds of the exit delay.
NOTES:
The duration of the beeping is the programmed value of field *10 regardless of
which entry/exit zone is used to exit the premises. Exit Delay Sounding must
be enabled for SIA installations.
See page 32 in the Programming Guide, “SOUND OPTION”, prompt for
disabling the entry/exit beeps on individual keypads.
If enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the Bell 1 output.

0 = disable
1 = enable

1*48

Wireless Keypad Assignment

1*49

Suppress Transmitter
Supervision Sound
0 = disable
1 = enable

1*52

Send Cancel If Alarm + Off
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

1*53

Disable Download Callback

1*55

European Date Format

1*56

AC 60Hz or 50Hz

5-10

Select the partition in which RF keypad is used.

0 = none
1-8 = partition number

0 = callback required
1 = no callback required

If enabled, no trouble soundings occur on the keypad for transmitter check-in
failures.
Must be 0 for UL installations.

If enabled, Cancel reports are sent when the system is disarmed after an
alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by.
If disabled, Cancel reports are sent within Bell Timeout period only.
NOTES:
This option must be enabled so Cancel reports are always sent.
This field must be enabled for SIA installations.
Select whether a callback from the control panel is required for downloading.
Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

Select the date format for display in the event log.

0 = disable (mm/dd/yy)
1 = enable (dd/mm/yy)

0 = 60Hz
1 = 50Hz

Select the frequency for the AC.
Must be set to 0 for U.S. and Canadian installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

1*57

Enable 5800 RF Button Global
Arm

If enabled, the system arms/disarms in accordance with the button’s user’s
global arming settings.

0 = disable
1 = enable

1*58

Enable 5800 RF Button Force
Arm
0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, allows the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones
when arming the system.
NOTE: When attempting to arm the system, the keypad beeps once after the
button is pressed if any faulted zones are present. The user should then
press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and arm
the system.
If enabled, zone 5 is used for 2-way audio (AAV).
Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
NOTE: Zone 5 cannot be used as protection zone.

1*60

Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification

1*69

Printer Type

1*70

Event Log Types
0 = disable
1 = enable

This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Check, Bypass, Open/Close,
System. If enabled, the system logs those events into the event log.
NOTE: Events are also logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.

1*71

12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format

Select the type of time stamping for the event log.

1*72

Event Log Printer On-Line Mode

1*73

Printer Baud Rate

1*74

Relay Timeout XXX Minutes

1*75

Relay Timeout YYY Seconds

1*76

Access Control Relay (partitionspecific)

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = parallel printer
1 = serial printer

Select the printer type for the event log printout.
NOTE: if you are using a parallel printer connected to the VA8201 Alpha
Pager Module.

0 = 12-hour
1 = 24-hour

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = 1200
1 = 300

Enter 000-127 times 2 minutes (000-254).

Enter 000-127 seconds.

01-96 = relay number
00 = relay not used.

1*77

Log First Maintenance Signal

2*00

Number of Partitions

2*01

Daylight Saving Time Start/End
Month

0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, the system prints the events as they occur.
If disabled, the system prints the log only upon request.

Select the baud rate for the serial printer.
NOTE: Must be 1 if using the alphanumeric pager interface.

This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers
“04/09” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming output
command “56.”
This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers
“05/10” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming
command “57.”
If enabled, the assigned relay closes for 2 seconds when the user enters his
code and presses 0.
Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
NOTE: See SECTION 3: Installing the Control for enhanced access control
capabilities.
If enabled, the system logs the first maintenance signal from each smoke
detector. If disabled, no logging occurs.

Enter the number of partitions used in the system.

Enter 1-8.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight saving time starts and ends.
Enter 00, 00 if daylight saving time does not apply to the user’s region.
Standard setting for U.S. is 04,10.

5-11

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*02

Daylight Saving Time Start/End
Weekend

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight saving time as follows: 1=first;
2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last.
Standard setting for U.S. is 1,5.

0 = disable
1 = enable

UL
2*05

Fields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.

Auto-Arm Delay (partitionspecific)

This is the time between the end of the arming window and the start of autoarm warning time (field 2*06).

00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto arming.

2*06

Auto-Arm Warning Period
(partition-specific)

This is the time that the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to
exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.

01-15 times 1-minute warning.
00 = no warning period.

2*07

Auto-Disarm Delay (partitionspecific)

This is the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto
disarming of the system.

00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto disarming.

2*08

Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

2*09

Open/Close Reports by
Exception (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

2*10

Allow Disarming Only During
Arm/Disarm Windows (partitionspecific)
0 = disable
1 = enable

2*11

Allow Disarm Outside Window if
Alarm Occurs
0 = disable
1 = enable

2*18

Enable GOTO for this Partition
(partition-specific)

If enabled, the system automatically bypasses any faulted zones when it
attempts to auto-arm.
If disabled, the system will not auto-arm.

If enabled, Open/Close reports are sent only if the openings/closings occur
outside the arm and disarm windows.
NOTES:
Open reports are also suppressed during the closing window in order to
prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then re-enters the premises,
for example to retrieve a forgotten item.
Openings and closings are still recorded in the event log.
This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be
sent.
If enabled, disarming of the system is allowed only during the
arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1).
NOTE: This applies only to Operator-level users. Installer, Master, and
Manager-level users can disarm the system at any time.

If enabled, allows the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm
(opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Otherwise disarming is allowed
only during the disarm window.
NOTE: Used only if field 2*10 is enabled.
If enabled, this partition can be accessed from another partition’s keypad
using the GOTO command.

0 = disable
1 = enable

2*19

5-12

Use Partition Descriptor
0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, the normal keypad display will include a partition number and fourdigit descriptor.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*20

Enable J2 Triggers for Partition
(partition-specific)

If enabled, the J2 triggers function for this partition.

0 = disable
1 = enable

2*21

Supervision Pulses for LRR

2*22

Display Fire Alarms of Other
Partitions (partition-specific)

0 = disable
1 = enable

There are three entries in this field as follows: Fire, Burglary/Audible Panic,
Silent Panic/Duress.
If enabled, causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J2 radio
triggers to the LRR. The LRR uses these pulses to determine that its
connection to the control is still intact.
Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
If enabled, allows fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at
this partition’s keypad(s).

0 = disable
1 = enable

2*23

Display Burglary & Panic Alarms
for Other Partitions (partitionspecific)

If enabled, allows burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to
be displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).

0 = disable
1 = enable

2*24

Display Troubles of Other
Partitions (partition-specific)

If enabled, allows troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this
partition’s keypad(s).

0 = disable
1 = enable
Enable if the Alphanumeric Pager Module (VA8201) interface is installed.
NOTE: The APM is needed for alphanumeric type paging and/or printing to a
parallel printer.

2*30

Pager Installed

2*31

Delay Paging

2*32

Time to Delay Pager After Dialer
000-024 times 10 seconds (010-240).

This delay should be set to allow enough time for the central station to call
back the premises in order to verify an alarm condition. Field 2*31 must be
enabled.

2*33

Pager 1 Phone Number

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 1. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

2*34

Pager 1 ID Number

2*35

Pager 1 Format

2*36

Pager 1 Delay 1

2*37

Pager 1 Delay 2

This field has eight locations, one for each pager. If enabled, the system waits
the delay time specified in field 2*32 before transmitting the message after the
dialer completes sending the message.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 1. Enter up to 10 digits.

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 1.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

5-13

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*38

Pager 1 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 1 for the partition(s).

2*39

Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables

2*40

Pager 2 Phone Number

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 2. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 2. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*41

Pager 2 ID Number

2*42

Pager 2 Format

2*43

Pager 2 Delay 1

2*44

Pager 2 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*45

Pager 2 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 2 for the partition(s).

2*46

Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables

2*47

Pager 3 Phone Number

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 2.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 3. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 3. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*48

Pager 3 ID Number

2*49

Pager 3 Format

2*50

Pager 3 Delay 1

2*51

Pager 3 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*52

Pager 3 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 3 for the partition(s).

5-14

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 3.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*53

Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*54

Pager 4 Phone Number

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 4. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 4. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*55

Pager 4 ID Number

2*56

Pager 4 Format

2*57

Pager 4 Delay 1

2*58

Pager 4 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*59

Pager 4 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 4 for the partition(s).

2*60

Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables

2*61

Pager 5 Phone Number

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 4.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 5. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 5. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*62

Pager 5 ID Number

2*63

Pager 5 Format

2*64

Pager 5 Delay 1

2*65

Pager 5 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*66

Pager 5 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 5 for the partition(s).

2*67

Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 5.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

5-15

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*68

Pager 6 Phone Number

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 6. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 6. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*69

Pager 6 ID Number

2*70

Pager 6 Format

2*71

Pager 6 Delay 1

2*72

Pager 6 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*73

Pager 6 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 6 for the partition(s).

2*74

Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables

2*75

Pager 7 Phone Number

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 6.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 7. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 7. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*76

Pager 7 ID Number

2*77

Pager 7 Format

2*78

Pager 7 Delay 1

2*79

Pager 7 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*80

Pager 7 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 7 for the partition(s).

2*81

Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables

2*82

Pager 8 Phone Number

2*83

5-16

Enter 0-9
Enter the pager format for Pager 7.

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2second pause.

Pager 8 ID Number
Enter 0-9

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 8. Enter up to 17 digits. Do
not fill unused spaces.

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 8. Enter up to 10 digits.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

2*84

Pager 8 Format

Enter the pager format for Pager 8.

2*85

Pager 8 Delay 1

2*86

Pager 8 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information
is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*87

Pager 8 Partition Enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 8 for the partition(s).

2*88

Pager 8 Trigger Event Enables

3*00

Check or TRBL Display

3*01

Fire Display Lock
0 = disable
1 = enable

If enabled, the system locks the display on the first fire alarm. Press ✳ to
display the next fire alarm in the system. If disabled, the system scrolls all
alarms automatically.

3*12

Zone Type 18 Delay Use

If enabled, use the delay time programmed in field 3✳16.

3*13

Supervisory on Open and Short

3*14

Waterflow Alarm Silence Option

3*15

Alarm Sounds Bell 1 & 2

3*16

Zone Types 17 & 18 Delay

0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric

000-060 seconds.

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = CHECK
1 = TRBL

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is
sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Select whether the system should display CHECK or TRBL when a trouble
condition occurs.

0 = disable
1 = enable

0 = silenced by User Code + OFF
1 = silenced when zone restores

0 = pulsing
1 = steady

If enabled, the system produces a supervisory response on an open or short
circuit. If disabled, a short circuit produces a supervisory response and an
open produces a trouble response.
Select how the Waterflow zone type will be silenced.
NOTE: This feature may be set to 1 only by permission of the local authority.

This field has two entries, one for each Notification Appliance Circuits. If set
for pulsing, field ✳08 applies.

Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds
Enter 00 for no delay

Select the delay time for zone types 17 and 18. The zone must be faulted for
entire delay time before an alarm or supervisory condition occurs. This may
prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow.

3*17

Zone 6 Alternate Function Enable

If enabled, zone 6 may be used as a tamper zone (bell and cabinet tampers).

3*18

Extended Delay for Zone Types
17 & 18

0 = disable
1 = enable
This option allows the delay programmed in field 3✳16 for Waterflow and
Supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times.

0 = no extended delay
1 = multiply delay by 4

For Waterflow alarms, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 90 seconds.
For Fire Supervisory signals, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 200 seconds.

5-17

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

3*19

Auxiliary Input Alternate
Function Enable

If enabled, pins 5 and 9 on the J2 connector function as RS232 output and
input, respectively. If disabled, they function as fire alarm trigger and LRR
Xmit Okay. See the chart at field 3*20 for the J2 trigger configurations.

0 = disable
1 = enable

3*20

NOTE: If field 3*19 is enabled, you cannot use a LRR connected to the J2 trigger.

Select the function of the J2 trigger outputs. See chart below.

Trigger Outputs Function
Selection
0 = remote keypad sounder
1 = keyswitch LEDs
2 = 5140LED connection
J2 Pin

Field 3*19 = 0
Field3*20 = 0

Field 3*19 = 0
Field3*20 = 1

Panic Alarm

Trouble

Burglary Alarm

4
5

Fire Supervisory
Fire Alarm
Remote Console
Sounder
Open/Close
Ground
LRR Xmit Okay

Fire Supervisory
Fire Alarm

6
7
8
9

3*21

Keyswitch Ready LED
Keyswitch Armed LED
Ground
LRR Xmit Okay

Maximum Number of Dialer
Attempts

Field 3*19 = 0
Field3*20 = 2
5140LED Dialer 1 Fail
LED
Trouble
5140LED COMM Fail
LED
Fire Supervisory
Fire Alarm
5140LED Dialer 2 Fail
LED
5140LED AC Fail LED
Ground
LRR Xmit Okay

Field 3*19 = 1
As selected in field 3*20
As selected in field 3*20
As selected in field 3*20
As selected in field 3*20
RS232 Output
As selected in field 3*20
As selected in field 3*20
Ground
RS232 Input

Select the maximum number of dialer attempts for the system.

Enter the number of dialing attempts 1-8.

NOTE: Must be 3, 4, or 5 for NFPA 72 compliant systems if a secondary
phone number is programmed.

3*30

Dialer Selection

This field has two entries, one for each dialer (main and backup). Enter 1 if the
dialer is being used.

3*31

Backup Dialer TouchTone or
Rotary

0 = disable
1 = enable

Select the dialing method for the backup dialer.

0 = rotary
1 = touchtone

3*50

Zone Type Restore Enables for
Types 16-18
0 = disable
1 = enable

3*55

Reset on Second OFF for Bell 1

3*56

Reset on Second OFF for Bell 2

3*57

Confirmation of Arming Ding Bell
2 & Auxiliary Relay

0 = disable
1 = enable

5-18

This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
will send Restore reports.
Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

If enabled, the system resets bell 1 output when the second User Code +
OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 1
output after the first User Code + OFF.
If enabled, the system resets bell 2 output when the second User Code +
OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 2
output after the first User Code + OFF.
This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If
enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of
exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).
Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
FIELD

TITLE and DATA ENTRIES

EXPLANATION

3*59

Enable Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay
Chime Annunciation

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If
enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the output.

0 = disable
1 = enable

3*60

3*61

Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Timeout
Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.
00 = no timeout.

Auxiliary Relay Function
Selection
0 = trouble/supervisory
1 = alarm, silenced by User Code + OFF
2 = smoke detector reset
3 = battery save
4 = alarm, silenced by User Code + # + 67

3*82

Burglary Features on Partition 1
Enable

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay.
Defines the length of time the output and the keypad’s sounder will sound for
all audible alarms.
Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations
and a minimum 6 minutes for UL commercial fire installations.
Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay.
NOTES:
Smoke detector reset triggers the relay momentarily (approximately 6
seconds) on the second User Code + OFF entry.
Battery save is used to disconnect power from non-critical loads 4 hours after
AC loss.

If enabled, arming, test and chime modes can be used on partition 1.
NOTE: These features are automatically enabled on all other partitions.

0 = disable
1 = enable

3*85

System Zone Bypass Inhibit
0 = prevent bypass
1 = allow only installer to bypass
2 = allow only installer and master codes to
bypass

Select which codes, if any, can bypass fire zones and systems zones.
NOTES:
This applies to fire zones programmed with zone types 9, 16, 17, and 18 and
system zones 970-977.
The bypassing can only be done from partition 1.

5-19

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-20

S E C T I O N

Scheduling Options
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

•
•
•

You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.
Auto-disarming is not permitted in UL installations.
You must not program Random Scheduling of Time Driven Events for UL installations.

General
The scheduling features allow certain operations to be
automated, such as arming, disarming, bypassing of
zones, and activating relay outputs.
The system uses time windows (a programmed period of
time with a start and stop time) for defining open/close
schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary
schedules, and access schedules for users.
Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly
menu modes of programming (#80, #81, #83, and #93
modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus
take you step by step through the options.
Auto Arming
The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a
partition at the end of a pre-determined closing
(arming) time window.
Auto Arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the
Auto-Arm Delay, the Auto-Arm Warning, or by
manually extending the closing (arming) time window
with a keypad command.
The system can also automatically bypass any open
zones when auto arming.
Auto-Arm Delay
Auto-Arm Delay provides a delay (grace period) before
auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing time
window.
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56
minutes in partition-specific program field 2*05. At the
expiration of this delay, the Auto-Arm Warning will
start.
Auto-Arm Warning
The Auto-Arm Warning causes the keypad sounder to
warn the user of an impending Auto-Arm.
The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to
the arming in partition-specific program field 2*06.
During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds
and displays “AUTO ARM ALERT.” During the last 60
seconds, the keypads beep every 5 seconds.
The panel arms at the conclusion of the Auto-Arm
Warning period.

Extend Closing Window
A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time
window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a
keypad command (User Code + #82), which then
prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of
1 or 2.
This feature is useful if a user must stay on the
premises later than usual.
The Auto-Arm delay and warning periods begin at the
end of the extension.
Force Arm
The Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to
bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming (panel
performs a force-arm).
This option is set in partition-specific program field
2*08.
Auto Disarming
The system can automatically disarm a partition at the
end of a pre-determined opening (disarm) time window.
The disarming time can be delayed by using the AutoDisarm Delay feature.
Disarm Delay
Auto-Disarm Delay provides a delay before auto
disarming. This delay is added to the end of the disarm
time window.
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56
minutes, in partition-specific program field 2*07.
Restrict Disarming
This option allows disarming by users only during the
disarm time window and during the arming time
window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after
manually arming the partition).
This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10. If field
2*10 is set, we highly recommend setting field 2*11, as
well. This field allows the partition to be disarmed
outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the
partition is in alarm.

6-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Exception Reports
This option allows the reporting of openings and
closings to the central station only if the arming and
disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening
and closing time windows. It is set in partition-specific
field 2*09.
The system can be programmed to send Failed to Open
and Failed to Close reports if the partition is not armed
or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time
window.
Limitation of Access of Users by Time
A user’s access to the system can be limited to a certain
time period. Outside this time, that user’s code is
inactive. The system provides up to 8 access schedules,
each consisting of two time windows (typically one for
opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and
two time windows for holidays.
The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu
Mode, and enabled when a user’s access code is added
to the system.
If a user tries to operate the system outside the
schedule, the alpha keypad displays “Access Denied.”

Time-Driven Events
The system can automatically activate and de-activate
relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other
devices on and off. The Time-Driven events can be
activated at different times in relation to a time
window:
• At the beginning of a time window
• At the end of a time window
• During a time window (on at beginning of window,
off at end)
• At both the beginning and end of the time window
(e.g., to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a
coffee break)
• Random time at the start of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the start of the time
window)
• Random time at the end of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)
• Random during the time window (begins within 30
minutes after the start of the time window and ends
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)
The system can perform the same actions on a daily
basis, or can perform an action only once (e.g., turn on
the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 PM).
The system also provides up to 20 programmable
“timers” available to the end user for the purpose of
activating output devices at preset times and days.

Time Window Definitions
Scheduled events are based on time windows, (periods
of time) during which an event may take place. The
system supports up to 20 time windows, each defined by
a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.

The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are
used when programming the various schedules
(open/close, limitation of access), as well as for TimeDriven event control.

Scheduling Example
A store that has the following hours:

For this schedule, the four time windows need to be
programmed:

Monday to Friday

9am to 6pm

Saturday

10am to 4pm

Sunday

Closed

Holidays

Closed

The owner desires the following time windows to allow
time for employees to arm or disarm the system:
Monday to Friday
Saturday
Sunday & Holidays

6-2

Open (disarm)
Close (arm)
Open (disarm)
Close (arm)
Closed

8am to 9am
6pm to 6:30pm
9am to 10am
4pm to 4:30pm

Window
1
2
3
4

Start
8am
9am
4pm
6pm

Stop
9am
10am
4:30pm
6:30pm

Purpose
Monday-Friday open window
Saturday open window
Saturday close window
Monday-Fri. close window

Using the #80 Menu Mode, the installer can program
open/close schedules by assigning a time window to a
day of the week (windows are entered as 2-digit entries)
Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Hol

Op/Cl

01/04

01/05

02/03

00/00

NOTE: 00 is entered for those days on which the store
is closed.
Employees can arm and disarm the system, when
programmed, within the open and close time windows
without causing a report to be sent to the central
station (reporting by exception, field 2*09). The system
can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in
case an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (autoarm/auto-disarm).

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

Open/Close Schedules Definitions
General
The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three
schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window
for openings and one time window for closings.
There are three types of schedules available: Daily,
Holiday, and Temporary.
Daily Schedule
Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of
one opening window and one closing window per day.
Holiday Schedule
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily schedule
on selected holidays throughout the year.
The opening and closing windows are programmed in
the daily schedule, but the holidays themselves are
defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80
Menu Mode.
Temporary Schedule
The temporary schedule provides a method for the end
user to override the daily and holiday schedules. It
consists of one opening window and one closing window
for each day of the week. The schedule takes effect for
up to one week, after which it is automatically
deactivated.
This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary
Schedule Menu Mode.

Additional Schedules
Additional opening and closing schedules can be
programmed using the Time-Driven Event
Programming. For example, a schedule for normal
store openings/closings can be programmed with a daily
open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for
a lunch hour can be programmed using the TimeDriven event schedule programming.
Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for
detailed information.
Open/Close Reports by Exception
The system can help reduce communication traffic to
the central station by using the Open/Close Reports by
Exception feature. The Open/Close by Exception option
suppresses these reports from being sent to the central
station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected
time window. Reports are only sent if the arm or
disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.
The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in
its event log.
If a disarming occurs during a closing window (for
example, a person who arms the system forgets
something and has to re-enter), the Opening report
(although outside of the opening window) will not be
sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the
closing window).
This option is programmed in partition-specific program
field 2*09.

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling
The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.
6:01PM
5:59AM
6AM
9AM
9:01AM
3:59PM
4PM
6PM

6:01PM

Early Opening reports are
sent if system is manually
disarmed before opening
window begins.
Early and Late Opening
and Closing reports are
programmable options
in Report Code
Programming in the
Programming Guide.
They are not dependent
on the programming of
the Exception
Reporting option.

Auto-arm delay begins.
Auto-arm warning begins.
Auto-arm occurs after
warning expires (if autoarm is enabled).
Missed Closing reports are
sent if manual arming has
not occurred at expiration
of closing window.
Late Closing reports are
sent if system is manually
armed after the closing
window expires.

Opening Window
No reports are sent if
system is disarmed
during this time
window.
If an arming occurs,
a Closing report is
sent to the central
station regardless of
how the Exception
Reporting option is
set.

Auto-disarm delay begins.
Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if
auto-disarm is enabled).
Missed Opening reports are sent
if manual disarming has not
occurred at expiration of opening
window.
Late Opening reports are sent if
disarm occurs after the opening
window expires.
Early Closing reports are sent if
manual arming occurs before the
closing window begins.
Missed Opening/Closing type
reports are programmed in
Report Code Programming in
the Programming Guide. The
Exception Reporting option
must be set for these to be
sent.

Closing Window
No reports are sent
if system is armed*
during this time
window.
* or disarmed if
user needs to reenter premises.

5:59AM

6-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Scheduling Menu Mode
The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program
most of the scheduling and timed-event options. Enter
Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [0] from the normal
operating mode. NOTE: Only users with an Installer or
Master level user code may enter the #80 mode.
The following can be programmed while in this mode:
•
time windows
•
open/close schedules to each partition
•
holiday schedules
•
Time-Driven events (for system functions and relay
activation)
•
limitation of access schedules
Some scheduling features are programmed in Data
Field Programming Mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 0).
Some features are programmed in the #93 Menu Mode.
The programming scheduling fields are listed below.
System-Wide Fields:
*04
Enable Random Timers
1*74 –1*75
Relay timeout values
2*01-2*02
Daylight saving time options
Allow disarming outside window if alarm
2*11
occurs
Partition-Specific fields:
1*76
Access control relay for this partition
2*05
Auto-arm delay value
2*06
Auto-arm warning time
2*07
Auto-disarm delay value
2*08
Force-arm enable
2*09
Open/Close Reporting by Exception
2*10
Restrict disarm only during windows
#93 Menu Mode (System Group #3)
Scheduling related report codes

Event-driven options are programmed using Output
Programming in #93 Menu Mode. Relay activation can
also be Time-Driven and that those are programmed
using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-Driven
Event Programming later in this section for the
procedure.

Steps to Program Scheduling Options
This section contains examples of the
worksheets only. For complete worksheets,
see the Programming Guide accompanying this
Installation and Setup Guide.
In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the
worksheets to do the following:
1. Define time windows (up to 20)
2. Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule
per day, per partition)
3. Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to
16)
4. Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)
5. Define the Time-Driven events (up to 20)
NOTE: Temporary schedules are programmed using
#81 Menu Mode.
Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the
following functions:
6. Program the time windows
7. Program the open/close schedules
8. Program the Time-Driven events
9. Program the access schedules
Scheduling Menu Structure
To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:
Installer Code + [#] + [80]. (Installer or Master level
user code.)

Scheduling Program Mode can be entered only
when all partitions are disarmed.

There are 6 procedures of scheduling menus accessed via #80, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main menu
prompt selects that menu procedure. Prompts for programming that scheduling feature then appear. Enter 0 to skip a
procedure and display the next menu option.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Time Window ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt appears. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to Time
Windows Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.

O/C Schedules ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Holidays ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Timed Events ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

6-4

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to Open/Close Schedules Programming later in
this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.
Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to Holiday Schedule Programming later in this section for
detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.
Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional schedules, and other system functions. Refer
to Time-Driven Event Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Access Sched. ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to Limitation of Access Schedules Programming later in this
section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Quit?” prompt.

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to normal operating mode.
Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options. If you press 0, the “Time
Window?” prompt is displayed.

Time Windows
The system provides 20 time windows that are defined
with start and stop times. These windows are used for
various open/close and access schedules, as well as for
output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling
system. These windows are shared among all 8
partitions.

Time Window
Number

Start Time
(HH:MM)

Stop Time
(HH:MM)

1
2
3…..20

Time Windows Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
found in the Programming Guide. This worksheet will
help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of
this system before you program them. Note that time
windows can span midnight; for example, from 11 PM
to 1 AM.

PROMPT
Time Window ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

A time window must have a start and a stop time.
Time Windows Programming
Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code +
[#] + [80]. The keypad displays the Time Window
Programming prompt.

EXPLANATION
Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.
0

Time Window # ?
01-20, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be programmed.

01 TIME WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM

If you entered a time window number, the cursor is now positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of
window entry.

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Press [✳] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Time Window #?” prompt to quit time window
programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

Enter the desired start of window hour and press [✳]. The cursor moves to the minutes position. Enter the
desired minutes and press [✳]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is
under the A/P position and then press [✳]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.
When the entry is completed, the “Time Window #?” prompt is displayed again.
Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Because the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing a
time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.

Daily Open/Close Schedules
Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close
schedule, plus a holiday schedule. Temporary
schedules are programmed separately, using the #81
Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program
additional open/close schedules, see Time-Driven Events
Programming later in this section for the procedure.

Open/Close Schedule Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
found in the Programming Guide. Write the previously
defined time window numbers for open and close for
each partition.

6-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Part

Mon
Op

Tues
Cl

Wed
Op

Thur

Fri
Op

Sat
Cl

Sun
Cl

Hol

1
2
3…8
Open/Close Schedule Programming
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

O/C Schedules ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.
0

Partition # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following open/close schedules will apply.

Mon P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day’s opening schedule beginning with Monday.
Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has
been stored for that window number is displayed as a programming aid.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Partition #?” prompt to quit open/close schedules programming and display the “Quit
?” prompt.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.
Mon P1 CL WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number for the displayed day’s closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window number is displayed.

Tue P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

The keypad now prompts for Tuesday’s open/close schedule. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.
When the last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday opening and closing window prompts are
displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00

Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time windows.

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.
When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for
each partition in the system.

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Holiday Schedules
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year.
The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can be assigned to any
combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for
which these holidays apply.
Holiday Schedule Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet found in the Programming Guide.
HOL
1
2
3…16

6-6

Month/Day
/
/

Partition
3
4

Section 6 – Scheduling Options
Holiday Schedule Programming
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Holidays ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.
0

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?
01-16,00=Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed and press [✳] to accept entry.

01 ENTER DATE
00/00

The cursor is now positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press [✳] to
proceed to the day field.
Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.
Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press [0] to turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to
toggle the letter “x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.

Part ? 12345678
Hit 0-8 x x

Press the [✳] key when all desired partitions have been assigned.
The “Holiday Number?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be
programmed.

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Time-Driven Events
These schedules are used to activate outputs, bypass
zones, etc. based on time. There are 20 of these
schedules that may be programmed for the system,
each governed by the previously defined time windows.
The actions that can be programmed to automatically
activate at set times are: relay commands, arm/disarm
commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close
access conditions.
Time-Driven Events Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
found in the Programming Guide. Fill out the
worksheet using the steps outlined below.

Automatic Refresh Feature
The system automatically updates the status of all
Time-Driven Events upon any of the following
occurrences:
•
Changing of the time or date via #63 mode
•
Exiting #80 Scheduling Menu mode
•
Exiting Program mode
•
After a disconnect from the downloader
•
On a power-up
•
At Daylight Saving Time adjustment.

Sched

Time

Days

Action

Activation

Num.

Window

M T W T F S S H

Desired

Specifier

Time

1
2
3…20
1.

Enter the schedule number (01-20) and time
window number (01-20), and note the day of the
week the action is desired.
Enter the code for the desired action and
action specifier. The action codes represent the
events that are to take place when the scheduled
time is reached. Each action also requires an
action specifier, which defines what the action will
affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user
group). The action specifier varies, depending on
the type of action selected.

The following is a list of the Action Codes (desired
actions) used when programming Time-Driven events.
Note that these codes are independent of the relay
codes programmed during Output Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode.

6-7

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Relay Commands
Action Code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

Action
Relay On
Relay Off
Relay Close for 2 seconds
Relay Close XX minutes (set
in field 1*74)
Relay Close YY seconds (set
in field 1*75)
Relay Group On
Relay Group Off
Relay Group Close for 2
seconds
Relay Group Close XX
minutes (set in field 1*74)
Relay Group Close YY
seconds (set in field 1*75)

Action Specifier
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #

62
Relay #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #

23
24
25
26

•
•
•

Action
Arm-STAY
Arm AWAY
Disarm
Force Arm STAY (Autobypass faulted zns)
Force Arm AWAY (Autobypass faulted zns)
Arm INSTANT
Arm MAXIMUM

63
64
65
66
67

Relay Group #

Arm/Disarm Commands
Action Code
20
21
22

Action Code
57
58
59
60
61

70
Action Specifier
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)

The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies
when using Time-Driven events to auto-arm.
Temporary schedules do not override an
auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed
in Time-Driven events.
The auto-arming window cannot be extended
using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.

71
72
73
74
77
78

Action
Auto bypass – Zone list
Auto unbypass – Zone list

Action Specifier
Zone list #
Zone list #

Activation
Time

40
41
42
50

Action
Enable Opening Window by
partition
Enable Closing Window by
partition
Enable Access Window for
access group
Off-Normal Reminder
(starts local keypad beeping if
fire or system trouble
condition exists)

Action Code
55
56

6-8

Action
Access Point Grant
Access Point Grant with
Override

Action Specifier
Access Point #
Access Point #

Partition #
Partition #
Partition #
Partition #
Trigger #
Trigger #
Group #
Group #

Description

End of time window.

During time window active period only (on at
beginning of window, off at end).
For example, if bypass is selected to activate during
the window, zones in a zone list are bypassed at the
beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end
of the window.

Beginning and end of time window (e.g., a coffee
break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is
selected, the relay pulses for 2 seconds at the
beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of
the coffee break. At the end of the window it pulses
again, signaling the end of coffee break.

Random time at the start of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the start of the time window).
NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “5”
occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the
window, the time window must be of a duration of at
least 30 minutes.

Random time at the end of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).

Random during the time window (begins within 30
minutes after the start of the time window and ends
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).
NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “7”
occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the
window, the time window must be of a duration of at
least 30 minutes.

Access Group

Access Control Commands

Partition #

Beginning of time window.

Partition(s)

None

Group #
Group #
Group #
Group #
Partition #

Action Specifier
Partition(s)

Group #

Open/Close Windows
Action Code

Action Specifier
Access Point #
Access Point #
Access Point #
Access Point #
Group #

Enter the desired activation time (when the
action is to take place). Select from:

Bypass Commands
Action Code
30
31

Action
Access Point Protect
Access Point Bypass
Access Point Lock
Access Point Exit
Access Point Group Grant
Access Point Group Grant
with Override
Access Point Group Protect
Access Point Group Bypass
Access Point Group Lock
Access Point Group Exit
Access Point Partition Grant
Access Point Partition Grant
with Override
Access Point Protect by
Partition
Access Point Bypass by
Partition
Access Point Lock by
Partition
Access Point Exit by Partition
Access Point Trigger On
Access Point Trigger Off
Access Point Group Enable
Access Point Group Disable

Section 6 – Scheduling Options
Field *04 must be enabled for randomization. A user
must initiate a random schedule by entering one of the
following sequences:
•
[User Code] + [#] + [41]. This will randomize, up
to 30 minutes, the activation time of all devices,
programmed for randomization, assigned to the
partition the sequence is entered in. Enter the
sequence again to turn off the random schedule.
•
[User Code] + [#] + [42]. This is the same as the
method above, except the randomization occurs
only on devices with activation times within 6 PM
and 5 AM. Enter the same sequence again to turn
off the random schedule.

You must not program Random Scheduling of
Time Driven Events for UL installations.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Timed Events ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to program timed events.

Time-Driven Event Programming
The following menu items must first be programmed in
Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:
Enter Relay No.
Output Group
Restriction
Output Type
Zone No.
ECP Address
Relay No.
LED No.

(reference identification number)
(if applicable)
(V-Plex, 4204/4204CF, or FSA)
(V-Plex)
(4204/4204CF or FSA)
(4204/4204CF)
(FSA)

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until
the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.

TIMED EVENT # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).

01 ACTION ?
none
00

Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list at the left. This could be an output command,
an arming command, or any other Time-Driven event.

ACTION CODES

EXPLANATION

ACTION SPECIFIER

01=Relay On
02=Relay Off
03=Relay Close for 2 seconds
04=Relay Close XX minutes
05=Relay Close YY seconds

Actions 01-05
If you selected actions 01-05, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay
number.

01 RELAY # ?

06=Relay Group On
07=Relay Group Off
08=Relay Group Close for 2
seconds
09=Relay Group Close XX
minutes
10=Relay Group Close YY
seconds

Actions 06-10
If you selected actions 06-10, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay
group number.

20=Arm-STAY
21=Arm AWAY
22=Disarm
23=Force Arm STAY
24=Force Arm AWAY
25=Arm INSTANT
26=Arm MAXIMUM
40=Enable Open Window by
Part.
41=Enable Close Window by
Part.

Actions 21-26 and 40-41
If you selected actions 21-26 or 40-41, the prompt at the right appears. Enter
the partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter
a partition number again to deselect it.

Press [✳].
The system then prompts the user to enter the desired action to be taken.
Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

Press [✳] to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier appears.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY GRP # ?
00

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X X

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

6-9

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
ACTION CODES

EXPLANATION

ACTION SPECIFIER

30=Auto bypass – Zone list
31=Auto unbypass – Zone list

Actions 30-31
If you selected actions 30-31, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the zone
list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed.

01 ZONE LIST ?
ENTER 01-15

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
42=Enable Access Window for
Access group(s)

Action 42
If you selected action 42, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the group
number to which the time window will apply.

GROUP ? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
50=Off-Normal Reminder

Action 50
No action specifier is required for this action since the condition that this
occurs for are system-wide.

55=Access Point Grant
56=Access Point Grant
w/Override
57=Access Point Protect
58=Access Point Bypass
59=Access Point Lock
60=Access Point Exit

Actions 55-60
If you selected actions 55-60, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
access point number.

61=Access Point Group Grant
62=Access Point Group Grant
w/Override
63=Access Point Group
Protect
64=Access Point Group
Bypass
65=Access Point Group Lock
66=Access Point Group Exit
77=Access Point Group
Enable
78=Access Point Group
Disable

Actions 61-66 and 77-78
If you selected actions 61-66, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
group number.

67=Access Point Partition
Grant
68=Access Point Partition
Grant w/Override
69=Access Point Protect by
Partition
70=Access Point Bypass by
Partition
71=Access Point Lock by
Partition
72=Access Point Exit by
Partition

Actions 67-72
If you selected actions 67-72, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter a
partition number again to deselect it.

73=Access Point Trigger On
74=Access Point Trigger Off

Actions 73-74
If actions 73-74 were selected, the prompt at the right will be displayed. Enter
the trigger number.

01 ACCESS POINT #
000

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

GROUP #
00

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X X

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 TRIGGER #
00

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

01 Time Window ?
00:00 00:00 01

Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the time window number is displayed.

6-10

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

01 Active time ?

Enter the activation time from 1-10 (listed below). As the number is keyed in, the activation time is
displayed. The choices are:
1: Trigger at the start of the window.
2: Trigger at the end of the window.
3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.
4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window. Example: coffee break buzzer.
5: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the start of the window.
6: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the end of the window.
7: Take effect only for the duration of the window, but random start and end the window up to 30 minutes.

Press [✳] to accept entry.
The system then asks for which days the event is to be activated.
Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday
= 1, Holiday = H = 8).
When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each timed event for the installation.

Days ? MTWTFSSH
Hit 0-8 x x

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit
Scheduling Menu Mode.

Limitation of Access Schedules
The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that
user is added to the system. If no limitations apply,
enter 0.

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user’s access
code is limited to working during a certain period of
time. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of
which consists of two time windows for each day of the
week and two time windows for holidays (typically, one
for an opening time window and the second for a closing
time window). A user, required to follow a schedule,
would be assigned to an access group of the same
number (e.g., schedule 1= group 1).

Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet
Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.
Acc
Sch

Mon
W1

Tues

Wed
W1

Thurs
W1

Fri
W1

Sat
W2

Sun
W2

Hol
W1

1
2
3…8

NOTE: The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule.
Limitation of Access Schedules Programming
To program access schedules enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu
Mode, press [0] until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT
Access Sched. ?
1 = YES 0 = NO
ACCESS SCHED # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01

EXPLANATION
Enter 1 to program access schedules.
0
Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.
Press [✳] to accept entry.
Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

6-11

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

MON A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00

Enter the first time-window number (01-20) for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is
keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

MON A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00
00

Enter the second time-window number from 01-20 for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the
number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

TUE A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00
00

Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the last day of the week has been programmed,
the windows for holidays may be entered.

Hol A1 Window 1 ?
00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Press [✳] to continue.
Enter the second time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Hol A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00 00

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO

Press [✳] to continue.

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedules
A temporary schedule affects only the partition from
which it is entered. Temporary schedules can also be
reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#])
to the “DAYS?” prompt and activating the appropriate
days. This should be considered when defining daily
time windows.

Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule,
which overrides the regular open/close schedule (and
the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as
soon as it is programmed, and remains active for up to
one week.
Only users with the authority level of manager or
higher can program temporary schedules.
Temporary Schedule Worksheet
Partition/Windows
1

Mon

Disarm Window
Start Time

HH:MM

Stop Time

HH:MM

Arm Window
Start Time

HH:MM

Stop Time

HH:MM

2…8 Disarm Window
Start Time

HH:MM

Stop Time

HH:MM

Arm Window

6-12

Start Time

HH:MM

Stop Time

HH:MM

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Section 6 – Scheduling Options
Temporary Schedules Programming
Enter User Code + [#] + 81 to enter this mode.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Mon DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm (opening) window for Monday.
Upon entry of this mode, the cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm
window. Enter the desired hour.
Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.
Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
Press [✳] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing) window for Monday.
Pressing [#] scrolls you through the prompts without making any changes.

Mon ARM WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm (closing) window for Monday.
The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window. Enter the hour.
Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.
Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
After the windows for that day have been completed, the system prompts for disarm and arm time windows
for the next day.
Press [#] if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM

Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.
When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the system prompts for which days of the
schedule are to be activated.

Days ? MTWTFSS
Hit 0-7 x x

This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule.
To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “X” appears under that day, indicating the
temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0
toggles all days on/off.
The temporary schedule is in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week
progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other entries for the temporary schedule
remain programmed.
Press [✳] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any
changes.

User Scheduling Menu Mode
The system provides up to 20 “timers” available to the end user to control output devices. The output devices themselves
are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. The end user
needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.
The installer may set certain outputs to be “restricted” during Output Programming (this prevents the end user from
controlling doors, pumps, Notification Appliance Circuits, etc.)
To enter this mode, the user enters User Code + [#] + 83.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Output Timer # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press [✳] to accept entry and move to the next
prompt.
Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P
PORCH LITE 04

If that timer number has already been programmed, a summary screen appears. In this example:
06 = Timer #
07:00PM = Start Time
11:45PM = Stop Time
PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4
04 = Output Device # affected by this timer
Press [✳] to continue.

6-13

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

06 ENTER OUTPUT#
PORCH LITE 04

Enter the desired output number (01-96). As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device is
displayed.
Press [✳] to continue.

Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an output
descriptor of “None.” Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

06 ON TIME ?
07:00 PM

The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the ON time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move
to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by
hitting any key from 0-9 while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [✳] to continue.

06 OFF TIME ?
11:45 PM

The cursor positioned on the tens of hours digit of the OFF time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move
to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by
hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [✳] to continue.

06 DAYS? MTWTFSS
HIT 0-7
x x

To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “x” appears under that day, indicating the
output for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0 toggles all
days on/off.
The outputs are in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses,
the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent option is selected (next screen
prompt).
When completed, press [✳] to continue.

06 Permanent ?
0 = NO,1 = YES 0

Selecting “Permanent” (1) means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis. Selecting 0
means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter “x” under the day is then cleared, but
all other entries for the output device remain programmed.
Press [✳] to accept entry.
The system quits User Scheduling Mode and returns to normal operating mode.

6-14

S E C T I O N

Downloading Primer
(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

General Information
Downloading allows the operator to remotely access,
program, and control the security system over normal
telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly
from the keypad can be done remotely, using
ADEMCO’s COMPASS downloading software. To
communicate with the control panel, the following is
required:
1. IBM PC-compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with
100 MB of available hard disk space and at least
8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X,
Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT.
2. One of the following modems:
•
ADEMCO CIA
•
Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2
or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)
•
Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external
•
Hayes Optima 336
•
BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume
•
BizComp Intellimodem 2400
Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to
be 100% compatible.
3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software available on
CD ROM with a complete User’s Manual. It may
also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page.
The web address is http://www.ademco.com.
Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP
switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch
will not work.

Access Security
The following four levels of protection guard the control
against compromise while it is being accessed from a
remote location:
1. Security code handshake: The subscriber’s account
number as well as an 8-digit ID number (known
only to the office) must be matched between the
control and computer.
2. Hang-up and callback: The control panel “hangs
up” and calls the computer back at the preprogrammed number only if the security codes
match.
3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged
between the computer and control is encrypted to
reduce the possibility of anyone “tapping” the line
and corrupting data.
4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned
various levels of access to the downloader, each
having its own log-on code. The access levels allow
the operators read/write capabilities of the
customers’ account information. For a detailed
explanation of the access levels, see the
downloading software User Manual.
NOTES:
•
Each time the control panel is accessed
successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent to
the central station, if Opening reports are
programmed.
•
When the system is downloading, the keypad
displays “MODEM COMM.”
•
After each download or save, an automatic time
stamp is done, to indicate the last download (or
save) and the operator ID number.
•
A complete hard copy of each individual account
can be obtained by connecting a printer to the
computer. Refer to your computer Owner’s Manual
or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.

Unattended Download
Unattended download allows the control panel to
communicate with the download computer without an
operator at the computer. This feature is useful on new
installations.
The installer can mount the control, attach a keypad
and phone line, and continue to wire the rest of the
installation while the system is automatically
downloaded.

The following items must be programmed for
unattended download:
•
•

The account number (field ✳32)
Primary central station telephone number (field
✳33)
•
The download telephone number (field ✳35)
•
Unattended Mode (enable in field ✳54.)
NOTE: The default for field ✳54 is enabled (1).

7-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Installer Unattended Program Mode
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed
menu selection. Pressing 0 displays the next choice in
The Installer Unattended Program Mode allows the
sequence.
installer to program fields ✳32, ✳33, and ✳35 without
entering the normal program mode.
To access this mode, enter Installer Code + [#] + [89]. The following prompt appears:

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Unattend. Phone
1 = YES 0 = NO

Press 1 to enter the unattended phone number.
0

Unattend. Phone

Enter the telephone number of the download software modem.
Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = ✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the
✳ key to accept the phone number and exit.
Press the # key to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit the Installer Unattended Program Mode, or 0 to
continue to the next prompt.

Unattended Acct#
1 = YES 0 = NO

Press 1 to enter the unattended account number.
0

Unattended Acct#
15-15-15-15

Enter a 3-or 4-digit (depending on report format) account number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires
a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used,
enter digits in the first 3 locations, and enter 00 in the last location.
Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.
Press 1 to enter the primary phone number.

Primary Phone
1 = YES 0 = NO

Primary Phone

Enter the primary central station telephone number.
Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = ✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the
D key accept the phone number and exit.
Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO
Trig. Unattended
1 = YES 0 = NO

Enter 1 to quit the Installer Unattended Program Mode. Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the first
menu prompt, “UNATTEND. PHONE”.

Enter 1 to initiate the unattended download at this time. Otherwise enter 0.
NOTE: The ADEMCO Compass Downloader must be in Unattended Mode.

An unattended download may be initiated by the installer or end user at any time by entering User Code + [#] + [1].

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel
At the protected premises, the control panel must be
connected to the existing telephone line (refer to the
SECTION 3: Installing the Control). No programming
of the panel is required before downloading to an initial
installation unless you are performing an unattended
download.

7-2

When establishing a connection between the computer
and the control panel, the following occurs:
Stage

What Happens

The computer calls up the control panel.
(The phone number for each customer must
be entered into the customer’s account file
on the computer.)

The control panel answers the phone call at
the pre-programmed ring count and executes
a handshake with the computer.

Section 7 – Downloading
Stage

What Happens

The computer sends a request for callback to
the control, unless callback is not required.

The panel acknowledges the request and
hangs up. During the next few seconds, the
control processes the request, making sure
certain encrypted information received from
the computer matches its own memory.

Upon a successful match, the control panel
seizes the phone line and calls the computer
back, unless callback is not required. (The
phone number to which the computer’s
modem is connected must be programmed
into the control field ✳35.)

The computer answers, usually by the
second ring, and executes a handshake with
the panel.

The panel then sends other default
information to the computer. If this
information matches the computer’s
information, a successful link is established.
The system is now “on-line” with the
computer.

•

Alarms and Trouble responses and reports
are disabled during actual uploading or
downloading sessions. If you are on-line,
but not actively uploading or downloading,
all alarms report immediately. All other
reports are delayed until you complete the
session.
The keypads remain active when on-line
with a control, but are inactive during
actual uploading or downloading sessions.

To download a control without programming any
information, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Enter the Installer Code + [#] + [5]. The
panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5
and sets the Download Callback option to “1”
(callback not required).

From the computer, call the panel using the
downloader
software
set
to
“First
Communication” Mode.
The downloader establishes a session with no
callback. The panel information can then be
downloaded.

On-Line Control Functions
The following functions can be performed while on-line
with a control panel (see field *37):
•
Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the
system
•
Bypass a zone
•
Force the system to accept a new program
download
•
Shut down communication (dialer) functions (for
nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned
system)
•
Shut down all security system functions (for
nonpayment for a leased system)
•
Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents
takeover of your accounts)
•
Leave a message for customer
NOTE: Messages sent to the control panel from the
downloader will be viewable at ALL partitions.
•
Command the system to upload a copy of its
resident program to the office
•
Read: arming status, AC power status, list of
faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 1024 event
log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones
currently in trouble, and ECP equipment list
•
Set the real-time clock

Scheduled Download
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be
programmed to periodically and automatically call the
downloader. When this option is set up, the system will
call the downloader at a scheduled time. Once the
connection is established with the modem, the
downloader controls which functions are performed
(download, arm, upload event log, etc.).
The programmable options for the scheduled download
are located in the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming
Guide under the main menu prompt Scheduled Checkin.

The options are as follows:
•
Check-in interval (weekly, monthly quarterly,
yearly)
•
Quarter of the year (if quarterly is selected)
•
Month of the year (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly
is selected)
•
Day of the month (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly
is selected)
•
Day of the week (if weekly is selected)
•
Time of day
Refer to the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming Guide
for sequence of the prompts.

7-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Direct-Wire Downloading
Connector J2 on the main PC board (see the Summary
of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this
manual) is intended to be interfaced to either a local
serial printer (see Event Log Connections in SECTION
3 Installing the Control) or a computer. Make
connections to a computer as shown below. Note that
the violet wire connection for a computer differs
from that used when connecting a serial printer.

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be downloaded
without using a modem or telephone line by using a
4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading
Software. The direct-wire downloading connection is to
be temporary, and is not part of the permanent
installation. Direct-wire downloading is meant as a tool
for the installer during the installation process.
The connections between the control and
the 4100SM are different than those shown
in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See
Figure 7-1 for the correct connections. In
addition, in place of the green wire, referred to
in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY”
section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the
violet wire instead.

Remove the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module, if it
is installed, before performing the direct-wire
download. It may be reconnected once the
direct-wire download is completed.

▲

TO
AUX PWR 1
OUTPUT

+ (TO TERM 11)

▲

4100SM
J2 CONNECTOR
3 4 5 6 7 8

– (TO TERM 12)

8 + PWR
7 – (GND)

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

5 not used
4 not used
3 TXD

OU
T
OU 4
T
OU 7
T
OU 3
T
OU 6
T
OU 2
T
OU 5
T
GR 1
OU
IN ND
PU
T
1

BLACK

6 RXD

2 not used
1 not used
4142TR CABLE
RED BLUE WHITE

NOTE: ENTER THE INSTALLER
CODE + [#] + [5] TO INITIATE
DOWNLOADING BEFORE MAKING
THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS TO
AVOID TRIGGERING A FAULT ON
INPUT 1.

10 FT.
CABLE
SUPPLIED
WITH 4100SM

DOWNLOADING
PC

Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections

Telco Handoff
Telco handoff is another method of getting on-line with the downloader. The installer or customer enters the User Code
+ [#] + [1], while on the phone line with the computer’s modem phone line. The customer will get cut-off and the panel
and download computer will establish a connection.

7-4

S E C T I O N

Setting the Real-Time Clock
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

General Information
This system provides a real-time clock, which must be
set in order for the system’s event log to keep track of
events by time and date. It must also be set in order to
execute scheduling programs (Time-Driven events). If
you are using Panel Linking, you can set the Real-Time
clock at one panel and have the system automatically
update the time and date at the other control panels.

Use a 6139/6160 alpha keypad to set the realtime clock, or set the clock via the downloader
software. Only users with Installer or Master
authority level can set the clock.

Setting the Time and Date
To set the real time clock, perform the following steps:
Step

Action

Enter Installer or Master Code + [#] 63.
Typical display shows:
TIME/DATE –– THU
12:01 AM
01/01/90
The day of the week is automatically
calculated based on the date entered. Time
and date entries are made by simply entering
the appropriate hour, minute, month, day
and year.
Press [✳] to move the cursor to the right of
the display, to the next position.
Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the
display, to the previous position.

2
3

Enter the correct hour. Then press [✳] to
move to the “minutes” field.
Enter the correct minutes. Press [✳] to move
to the AM/PM position.

Step

Action

Press any key 0-9 to change AM to PM, or PM
to AM. Press [✳] to move cursor to the
“month” field position.

Enter the correct month using a 2-digit entry.
Press [✳] to move cursor to the “day” field
position.

Enter the correct day using a 2-digit entry.
Press [✳] to move cursor to the “year” field
position.

Enter the correct year.

Press [✳] to continue.
The following display appears:
Broadcast Time?
1=YES 0=NO

If panel linking is being used, enter 1 (YES)
to send this time and date setting to all the
other panels. Otherwise enter 0.
Press [✳] to exit the real-time clock edit
mode.

8-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

8-2

S E C T I O N

User Access Codes
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

General Information
The VISTA-128FBP system allows a total of 150
security access codes to be allocated. The VISTA250FBP allows a total of 250 security access codes to be
allocated. Each security access code is identified by a
user ID number. Regardless of the number of
partitions each code has access to, it occupies
only one user slot in the system. If a particular
code is not used in all partitions, that user ID
number cannot be used again.
The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed
(partition-specific program field *29). The Quick Arm
feature allows the user to arm the system by pressing
the [#] key instead of the security code. The security
code must always be entered to disarm the system.

•
•

A user code other than the installer code
must be programmed in order for the Quick
Arm feature to function.
Users 001-050 are the only users that can
perform panel linking and are automatically
assigned panel linking access.

The system is shipped with the following defaults
for the user codes:
User

4-Digit Code

Alpha Descriptor

User 1 (Installer)

5140

INSTLR

User 2

1234

MASTER

User Codes & Levels of Authority
Each user of the system can be assigned a level of
authority, which authorizes the user for certain system
functions. A user can have different levels of authority
within different partitions
Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code
•
Programmed in field *00 (default = 5-1-4-0).
Installer Open/Close reporting selected in field *39.
•
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if armed by
another code (or by Quick Arm).
•
Can add, delete, or change all other codes, and can
select Open/Close reports for any user.
•
Is the only code that can be used to enter program
mode. The Installer Code can be prevented from reentering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98.
•
Must program at least one Master Code during
initial installation. Master Codes are codes
intended for use by the primary user(s) of the
system.
Level 1: Master Codes
•
Can perform all normal system functions.
•
Can be used to assign up to 148 lower-level codes,
which can be used by other users of the system.
•
Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.
•
May change his own code.
•
Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator
Codes. Each user’s code can be individually
eliminated or changed at any time.
•
Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as
that of the Master who is adding the new user.

Use the “View Capabilities” keypad function (User
Code + [✳] + [✳]) to view the partitions and authority
levels for which a particular user is authorized. These
levels are described below.
Level 2: Manager Codes
•
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.
•
May add, delete, or change other users of the
system below this level (Manager cannot assign
anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).
•
May change his own code.
•
Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as
that of the Manager who is adding the new user.
Levels 3-5: Operator Codes
•
Can operate a partition, but cannot add or modify
any user code (see table below).
Level
3
4
5
•

Title
Operator A
Operator B
Operator C

Functions Permitted
Arm, Disarm, Bypass
Arm, Disarm
Arm, Disarm only if armed with
same code

Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter
Code) cannot disarm the system unless the system
was armed with that code. This code is usually
assigned to persons who may need to arm and
disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a
babysitter needs to control the system only when
babysitting).

9-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Level 6: Duress Codes
•
Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station
if the user is being forced to disarm (or arm) the
system under threat (system must be connected to
a central station).
•
When the system’s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are
connected to another communication’s media
(Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that
duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals
silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique
report when digitally communicated).
•
Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can
be any code or codes desired.
General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes
The following rules apply to users when making modifications
within the system based on the user code authority levels:
Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used
•
interchangeably when performing system functions within a
partition (a system armed with a user’s temporary code can
be disarmed with the Master Code or another user’s
temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code
described above.
A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME
•
or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned.
A user (levels 0, 1 and 2 only) may only ADD users to a
•
LOWER authority level.
A user may assign other users access to only those
•
partitions to which he himself has access.
A user code can be DELETED or CHANGED only from
•
within the partition it was created in.
User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user
•
numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a “00”
(e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user
understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered
as 4-digit numbers.

Duress Reporting NOTE: A non-zero report
code for zone 992 (duress) must be
programmed, and partition-specific field *85
duress location enabled, to enable Duress
reporting.
•

The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the
5th key depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key
depression (last digit of code). Duress reports are
not triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when
you perform a GOTO or view the capabilities of a
user.

Open/Close Reporting Note: When a user is added,
the system prompts for Open/Close reporting capability
only if the installer is adding the new user. When a
Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user’s
Open/Close reporting is the same as that of the Master
or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close
reports are required to be selectable by the Master or
Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or
Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting
enabled, and one without.
Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled
if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close reporting, and
that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick
Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User 002 must
have authority and Open/Close must be enabled for all
partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not
desired, it is suggested that user 002 be assigned
authority level 5 in all partitions, and that the code be
kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system
unless armed by that user.
ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of
reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other
report format is used, only user numbers 001 –
015 can uniquely report to the central station.
Users 016 – 150 will report as User 015.

Multiple Partition Access
Each user is programmed for a primary (home)
partition. A user can also be given access to operate
one or more additional partitions. Within each
partition, each user may be programmed to have
different levels of authority. For example, User 003,
the VP of Engineering, could be assigned to work within
the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC
Manufacturing. Because he needs the full capabilities
in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1
authority.
He must also be able to gain access to the
manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency
basis. You can set this up easily by requesting that he
also be assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority
set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B).

9-2

The control automatically assigns him the same user
number within Partition 2.
EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS
Part 1

Part 2

User 3

Level 1

Level 4

Master

Oper B

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 6

Part 7

Part 8

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in
Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2.
His user number is the same for both partitions. Note
that if a user number is already being used in a
partition, the system will automatically assign a new
user an unused number. Also notice that no access is
allowed for this user into Partitions 3 – 8. Attempts to
access these partitions would be denied automatically.

Section 9 – User Access Codes

Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
During user code entry, normal key
depressions at other keypads in a partition are
ignored. However, panic key depression
causes an alarm and terminates user entry.

When entering panel link users (001-050) on the
local panel, the other remote panels will be
prevented from entering panel link user data until
the local panel exits User Edit Mode.

PROMPT
User Number = 003
Enter Auth. Level

Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user no. (002-150)
+ new user’s code
†Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a
higher level of authority than the code being changed
(e.g., a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code,
but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
Keypad prompts for the authority level for this user.
NOTE: All references to the number of user codes
pertain to the VISTA-250FBP. The VISTA-128FBP
allows only 150 user codes.

EXPLANATION
Enter the level number as follows:
1 = Master
2 = Manager
3 = Operator Level A
4 = Operator Level B
5 = Operator Level C
6 = Duress
Keypad then prompts for Open/Close reporting option for this user.

Open/Close Rep.?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not arming/disarming by this user will trigger
Opening and Closing reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a
user.

Group Bypassing?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to allow this user to perform group bypasses. Enter 0 (NO) this user will not be
able to perform group bypasses.
NOTE: In addition to enabling the user for group bypassing, the user must also have access to
the partition(s) containing the zones being bypassed and have global arming capability.

Access Group?
Enter 0-8

If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears. Enter the user’s access
group number (1-8) if this user should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access
group should be assigned.

RF Button ?
0=NO , 1=YES

If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for arming/disarming functions, and is not
assigned to a user, this prompt appears. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

Enter Button ZN #
(001-087)

If you answered “yes” to the RF button question, the zone number for the button is requested.
Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY, or
DISARM. The system then assigns all buttons of the transmitter to this user number.

Multi-Access ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to
have access to more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad
prompts for the Global Arm option for this user.

Global Arm ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one
partition via Global Arm prompts (described in the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP User Guide).
The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.

9-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

Part. 2 – SHOP ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed
partition number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in
sequence.
If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:
User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority Level prompt above).
•
Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see Open/Close prompt above).
•
Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.
•
When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which
access has been assigned, and will display the user number, authority level, open/close and
global arm options that were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted
access. For example:

XMT USER DATA
1 = YES 0 = NO

If the user number is from 001-050 this appears. Answer YES (1) to have the system send the
user’s attributes to all the other control panels that are “linked” to this control. If you answer NO
(0), the system displays the following prompt on the next page.

INDV USER PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO

Answer YES (1) to link to another control panel and manually enter the user into partition(s) in
that control panel. If you answer NO (0), the system scrolls through each partition displaying a
summary of the user’s attributes in each partition (see next prompt).

Part. 1 A0* WHSE
User 003 Auth=3G.

Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for
this user in the displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the second line indicates
Open/Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The “T” indicates the
partition from which the user may be changed or deleted.

Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter Installer Code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + new user’s code
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-128FBP allows only 150 user codes.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

User Number = 003
NEW USER?

The system detects that the user number is already assigned, and prompts if this is a new user.
Press 0 (NO).
The system then confirms that the change is allowed based on authorization level.

Adding an RF Key to an Existing User
To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user’s global arm option, first delete that user’s code, then re-add
the user code as described in the “Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code” paragraph.

9-4

Section 9 - User Access Codes

Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter your code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + your code again
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-128FBP allows only 150 user codes.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

OK TO DELETE 003?
0=NO
1=YES

The system prompts to confirm that you want to delete this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
If you answered “yes,” that user’s code is removed from all partitions to which it was assigned,
and all authorization levels and other information about that user are deleted. Note that a user
can be deleted only by a user with a higher authority level. A user cannot delete himself.

A user code can be deleted only from the partition through which it was entered. If an attempt is made to
delete from another partition, the message “User [XXX] Not Deleted” is displayed.

Exiting the User Edit Mode
Press either [✴] or [#], or don’t press any key for 10 seconds.

9-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

9-6

S E C T I O N

1 0

Testing the System
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Battery Test
When AC power is present, the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to
determine if there is a battery connected, and runs an
extended battery test every 4 hours to check on the
battery’s condition.

If the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP finds that the
battery voltage is low (less than approximately 11.5V),
it initiates a keypad “SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a
rapid keypad beeping sound. It also sends a Low
Battery report to the central station (if programmed).
The keypad is cleared by entering any security code +
OFF, and a Restore report is sent to the central station
if the situation has been corrected.

Dialer Test
The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP may be
programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a
central station at intervals ranging from once per hour
to once per 9999 hours (field ✳27).

UL requires the test report to be transmitted at least
once every 24 hours. The system can be programmed to
send the first report at any time of the day, or on any
day of the week (field ✳83).

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)
This test causes fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or
any NAC having a non-zero response type programmed)
to be activated (in either steady or pulsing manner, as
programmed in field 3✳15, for the purpose of
conducting a fire drill or bell test. This test can only be
activated by the installer or master users from partition
1 keypads by entering the corresponding security code +
[#] + 69. The burglary portion of the system must be
disarmed.

Keypads display “FIRE DRILL ACTIVE” while the test
is active. The test is stopped by entering any user code
+ OFF.
The system continues to monitor all 24-hour type zones
(fire, panic, etc.) and ends the test if any of these zone
types produce an alarm condition.
This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as
determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)
This test causes the system to sound console beeps and
Notification Appliance Circuit dings in response to fire
zone faults (zone type 9, 16 & 17) for the purpose of
allowing proper zone operation to be checked without
triggering alarms. Note that the system will not be
operational as an alarm system (i.e., cannot sense
alarms) while this test is active. The test can only be
activated by the installer by entering the Installer’s
Code and pressing [#] + 68 while the burglary portion of
the system is disarmed.
When this test is first activated, the system will display:

This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as
determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.
When testing non-latching devices, such as heat
detectors, be sure to keep the device faulted
until the system responds with the keypad beep
or siren sound. If the device is faulted only
momentarily, the system may not respond to the
fault.

PROMPT

EXPLANATION

USE BELL DING?

Enter 1 (YES) to have the fire Notification Appliance Circuits associated with each point sound for 3 seconds
when a point is faulted.
Enter 0 (NO) if only keypad sounders are desired.
The next prompt will be displayed.

0=NO

1=YES

10-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
PROMPT

EXPLANATION

AUTO-TEST DET?

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system automatically test all polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16.
Other fire zones will have to be tested manually.
Enter 0 (NO) to test every point manually.
The next prompt will be displayed.

0=NO

1=YES

For true detector sensitivity tests, and for compliance with fire codes, you must enter 0 (NO) to this question.

LOG RESULTS?
0=NO

1=YES

C.S. TRANSMIT?
0=NO

1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system log each point as it is tested. A list of untested points will also be logged.
Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to log the results.
The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report format has been selected.
Enter 1 (YES) to have the results of the test sent to the central station. This report will consist of a list of
points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested.
Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to report the results. A Walk-Test Start and Walk-Test End report will be
sent in either case (if programmed).

When the Test Mode is activated, the system will sound
fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or any NAC having
a non-zero response type programmed in the #93 Menu
Mode) for 3 seconds. The system will also send a Start
of Walk-Test message to the central station, and will
light all keypad indicators (except the ARMED LED)
and display window segments to verify that they are
working properly. The keypads will then display Fire
Walk-Test in Progress and will sound a single beep
every 15 seconds while this test is active.
The system will build a list of all the fire zones
(response types 9, 16, 17, 18) that need to be tested.
These points will be scrolled on the display. For each
point, the keypad will display "UNTST XXX," where
XXX is the point number, followed by an alpha
descriptor for the point.
If the auto-test option has been selected, the control
panel will attempt to automatically test all of the
polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9
or 16. For points that must be manually tested, fault
and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn.

Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire
Notification Appliance Circuits to ding. The keypads
will display the zone number and the associated alpha
descriptor while the zone remains faulted. The system
automatically issues a smoke detector power reset
about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these
zones, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.
The system will automatically perform the
smoke detector reset on zones 1 & 2, if
programmed for fire, and on the auxiliary relay
and any other output device (relay) that is
programmed for smoke detector reset.
To end the test, enter any security code and press OFF.
An End of Walk-Test message will be sent to the central
station (if programmed). Note that the test will
automatically end if no faults are detected within a 60minute time period.

Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)
This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in
response to faults on zones for the purpose of allowing
proper zone operation to be checked without triggering
alarms. This test can be activated by any user by
entering the corresponding security code and pressing
TEST while the burglary portion of the system is
disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a
weekly basis.
When this test is first entered, the system activates the
alarm output for 3 seconds. The system sends a Start of
Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypad
displays “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and sounds a
single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains
active.

10-2

Open and close each protected door and window in turn.
Each action should produce 3 beeps from the keypad.
Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen for three
beeps when the detector senses movement. The keypad
displays the zone number and alpha descriptor while a
door or window remains open or while a detector
remains activated. The system automatically issues a
Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10
seconds after it finds a fault on this zone, to allow
faulted detectors to be reset.
To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF.
An End of Walk-Test message is sent to the central
station.

Section 10 – Testing the System
The system automatically exits the Test mode if there is no activity (no doors or windows are opened and
closed, no motion detectors are activated, etc.) for 30 minutes on the VISTA-128FBP, 60 minutes on the
VISTA-250FBP. The system beeps the keypad(s) twice every 5 seconds during the last 5 minutes as a
warning that it is about to exit the Test mode and return to normal operation.

Armed Burglary System Test
•
•

Alarm messages are sent to the central
station during the armed tests. Notify the
central station that a test will be in progress.
A display of “COMM FAILURE” indicates a
failure to communicate (no kissoff by the
receiver at the central station). If this occurs,
verify that the phone line is connected, the
correct report format is programmed, etc.

Step

Action

Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if
programmed, by pressing the panic key pairs
(✳ and #, 1 and ✳, and/or 3 and #).
The word ALARM and a descriptor “999” are
displayed for ✳ and #. If [1] and [✳] are
pressed, “995” is displayed; if [3] and [#] are
pressed, “996” is displayed.

If the system has been programmed for
audible emergency, the keypad emits a loud,
steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by
entering the security code and pressing OFF.
If the system has been programmed for silent
panic, there are no audible alarms or
displays. A report is sent to the central
station, however.

Notify the central station that all tests are
finished, and verify results with them.

To perform an armed burglary test, proceed as follows:
Step

Action

Notify the central station that a test of the
system is being performed.

Arm the system.

Fault one or more zones.

Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by
entering the code and pressing OFF.
NOTE: The system must be rearmed after
each code + off sequence.

Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the
assigned delay times.

Testing Wireless Transmitters
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode
Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that
transmitters have all been properly programmed.

Go/No Go Test Mode
This mode assists in determining good mounting
locations, and that the RF transmission has sufficient
signal amplitude margin for the installed system.
•

If a transmitter does not have its serial number
“enrolled,” it will not turn off its zone number.

To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, proceed as
follows:
Step

Action

Enter Installer Code + [#] + [3]. The
keypad displays all zone numbers of wireless
units programmed into the system.

Fault each wireless zone, causing each device
to transmit.
As the system receives a signal from each of
the transmitters, the zone number of that
transmitter disappears from the display.

•

All partitions with wireless transmitters must
be placed in the test mode for RF receiver
sensitivity reduction (50%). Otherwise, the
RF receiver remains at full strength.
Make sure that all partitions are disarmed
for this test.

To enter the Go/No Go Test Mode, proceed as follows:
Step

Action

1
2

Enter Installer Code + [5].
Fault each wireless transmitter, causing each
device to transmit.
The keypad will beep three times if the signal
is received.

If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move
the transmitter to another location. Usually
a few inches in either direction is all that is
required.

Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the
Go/No Go Test Mode.

Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the
Sniffer Mode.

10-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Trouble Conditions
Supervisory Messages

Other System Messages

Display

Description

Display

Description

SUPV +
Zone
Number

This indicates that a fire supervisory
condition exists on the zone number
displayed. This means that the operation
of the fire alarm system may be
compromised.

COMM
FAILURE

Indicates a failure occurred in the
telephone communication portion of your
system.

LO BAT

Indicates a low-battery condition exists in
the wireless transmitter displayed.
Pressing any key silences the audible
warning sound.

SYSTEM
LO BAT

This indicates that a low-battery condition
exists with the system’s backup battery.

HSENS

Indicates a smoke detector with a high
sensitivity level, which may cause a false
alarm. The detector should be cleaned or
replaced.

LSENS

Indicates a smoke detector with a low
sensitivity level. The detector may not
detect a smoke condition. The detector
should be cleaned or replaced.

RCVR
SETUP
ERROR

Indicates the system has more wireless
zones programmed than the RF receiver
can support. If this is not corrected, none
of the zones in the system will be
protected. If additional wireless zones are
desired, use an appropriate receiver.

MODEM
COMM

This indicates that the control is on-line
with a remote computer.

Check or Trouble Messages
Display

Description

CHECK or
TRBL
(as per field
1✳07)

This indicates that a problem exists on
the zone number displayed. Zone trouble
may be caused by one of the following
conditions:
A hardwired fire zone is open
•
(broken wire).
A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is
•
faulted.
A polling loop zone is not seen by
•
the control panel.
A polling loop zone has been
•
tampered (cover removed on a
4190).
A wireless zone has not checked in
•
during the time programmed in field
1✳31.
A 5800 Series transmitter has been
•
tampered (cover removed).

CHECK 6XX
XX = 01-32

This indicates a trouble on a 4204CF
Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit
(corresponding relay number 01-32).

CHECK 8XX
XX = 00-30

This indicates a trouble on a peripheral
device (connected to the panel’s keypad
terminals) of the corresponding device
address (00-30).

CHECK 9XX
XX = 00-99

This indicates that a system trouble
exists (RF receiver, Notification
Appliance Circuit, etc.).

If the problem has been corrected, enter an
OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice
to clear the display.
Power Failure
Display

Description

AC LOSS
POWER
LED is off

This indicates that the system is
operating on battery power only. Check
to see that the circuit breaker for the
branch circuit that your system’s
transformer is wired to has not been
accidentally turned off. Instruct the
user to call a service representative
immediately if AC power cannot be
restored.

10-4

System Off-Normal Report
If programmed, an Off-Normal report is generated
instead of the periodic test report if any of the following
conditions are present at the time of the report:
Fire trouble on any zone (zone types 9, 16, 17, 18)
•
Fire supervisory present (zone type 18)
•
Unrestored fire alarm on any zone
•
Bypass of any fire zone
•
A fault for any supervised fire Notification
•
Appliance Circuit
Bypass/disable of any supervised fire Notification
•
Appliance Circuit
Telco fault of either dialer line
•
Bypass/disable of either dialer line
•
Earth ground fault
•
Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone
•
Fault on LORRA “XMIT OK” signal (if enabled)
•
LORRA trigger bypassed
•
AC failure
•
Low system battery
•
Keypad supervision fault
•
The Off-Normal report is sent as follows:
Contact ID: Code 608
•
High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used
•
(channel 9=6)
Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group
•
#4 report codes

Section 10 – Testing The System

To the Installer
Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually)
by the installer and frequent testing by the user are
vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm
system.
The installer should assume the responsibility of
developing and offering a regular maintenance program
to the user as well as acquainting the user with the
proper operation and limitations of the alarm system
and its component parts. Recommendations must be
included for a specific program of frequent testing (at
least weekly) to ensure the system’s proper operation at
all times.
Turning the System over to the User
Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by
going over each of its functions, as well as the User’s
Manual supplied.
In particular, explain the operation of each zone
(entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the
user understands how to operate any emergency
feature(s) programmed into the system.

Contacting Technical Support
PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure
you:
•
READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!
•
Check all wiring connections.
•
Determine that the power supply and/or backup
battery are supplying proper voltages.
•
Verify your programming information where
applicable.
•
Verify that all keypads and devices are addressed
properly.
•
Note the proper model number of this product, and
the version level (if known) along with any
documentation that came with the product.
•
Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or
company name.
Having this information handy will make it easier for
us to serve you quickly and effectively.
You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax.
Please include your return fax number. You will receive
a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical
Support via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support’s
Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are posted
within 24 hours.

Technical Support:.....................................................1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. EST)
ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK Automated Fax Retrieval System:.....................1-800-573-0153 or
................................................................................................. 1-516-921-6704 / ext. 1667
World Wide Web Address: .................................................HTTP://WWW.ADEMCO.COM

10-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

10-6

A P P E N D I X

Regulatory Agency Statements
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

UL Installation Requirements
The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary installations:
1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).
2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.
3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.
4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a
tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied with VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP) or by installing a UL
Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire the selected device to any
EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour
audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned
systems.
5. Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.

UL864/NFPA Local Fire
Configure at least one Notification Appliance Circuit for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators
to it. Program this circuit for temporal sounding.

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire
1. Size the backup battery for 24-hour standby (central station) or 60-hour standby (remote station) time.
2. For central station service, you may use the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAs alone, the main dialer with a
LORRA, or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module. For remote station service, you
must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module.
3. When using the LORRA, connect its channel inputs to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's fire alarm,
fire supervisory (if used), and trouble triggers. Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input 1 on the
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's J2 header. Program J2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24-hour trouble
response (type 19) to send radio faults.
4. When the main dialer is used, enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a telephone line. Assign a 24-hour
trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA128FBP/VISTA-250FBP will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault.
5. When the backup dialer is used, install it on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's PCB shield. Enable it
(field 3*30) and connect it to a separate telephone line. Assign a 24-hour trouble response (type 19) to
system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision.
6. When the dialer is used, program it to send fire alarm, fire supervisory (if used), trouble, AC loss, low
battery, normal dialer test, and off-normal dialer test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" maximum
so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.
7. If a secondary number is programmed, set the maximum number of dialer re-tries to 3, 4, or 5 in field
3*21.

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault
1. Use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP.
2. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors may not be used. If
4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.
3. Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP cabinet backbox. For safe
and vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the backbox. (Also see
Mounting the Cabinet in SECTION 3: Installing the Control)

A-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
4. Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the Notification Appliance Circuit. Bell wires must be run
in conduit. Program the Notification Appliance Circuit for 16 minutes or longer timeout and for
confirmation of arming ding. (Also see SECTION 3: Installing the Control)
5. Wire the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any
EOLR supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour
audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned
systems.
6. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
• You may use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.
• When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and Communicator Test
reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.
• If using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
For Grade AA Service:
• You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.
• Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
• You must use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.
• Connect the control's burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J2 header) to the 7720. Program a 24hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA250FBP will activate the burglary/audible panic trigger when a corresponding alarm is detected, and
will activate the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is detected.
• Also connect the 7720's radio fault output to one of the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's EOLRsupervised zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24-hour
alarm (type 07, 08) response to radio faults.
• Program the control's dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low Battery
reports.
For Grade AA Service:
Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.

California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements.
24-hour backup: The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations which require that all
residential fire alarm control panels installed after June 30, 1993 must be provided with a backup battery
which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the
intended standby condition, followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition. Be
sure to size the battery to meet this requirement.

A-2

Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) PART 15 STATEMENT
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the
RJ31X (CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on
installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will
result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been
disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If
upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company
that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or
out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an
authorized service agency for all repairs.
FCC PART 68 NOTICE
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for
this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following jacks:
An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty
information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request
that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the
manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the
reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

A-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
NOTICE
The Industry Canada Label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network
protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed
in
the
appropriate
Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s).
The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should
ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications
company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection. The
customer should be aware that compliance with
the above conditions may not prevent degradation
of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be
coordinated by a representative designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the
user
to
this
equipment,
or
equipment
malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications
company to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that
the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic
water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact an
appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) assigned to each terminal device provides
an indication of the maximum number of
terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not
exceed 5.

A-4

AVIS
L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le
matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le
matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,
d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les
documents concernant les exigences techniques
relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère
n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera
à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur. Avant d’installer
ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est
permis de le raccorder aux installations de
l’enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le
matériel doit également être installé en suivant
une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L’abonné
ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la
conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus
n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans
certaines situations.
Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent
être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par
le
fournisseur.
L’entreprise
de
télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur
da débrancher un appareil à la suite de
réparations ou de modifications effectuées par
l’utilisateur
ou
à
cause
de
mauvais
fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit
s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la
source
d’energie
électrique,
de
lignes
téléphoniques
et
des
canalisations
d’eau
métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
Cette précaution est particulièrement importante
dans les régions rurales.
Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter
de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir
racours à un service d’inspection des installations
électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique
le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être
raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d’une
interface téléphonique peut consister en une
combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule
condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de
la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.

A P P E N D I X

Summary of System Commands
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

User Code
Commands

Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User’s Code
Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User’s Code
Delete a User’s Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number to Be Deleted + Your Code
Again
View User Capability = User’s Code + [✳] + [✳]
Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] + 63

Programming
Commands

Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.
Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.
Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.
Enter Interactive Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000 + [#] + 93
Exit Program Mode = ✳99 or ✳98.

Event Logging
Commands

Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)
Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)
Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)

Wireless System
Commands

House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)
Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)
Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)

Additional
Commands

Partition GOTO

User Code + [✳] + Partition Number 0-8.

GOTO Home Partition

User Code + [✳] + 0.

Panics

[✳] + 1 or A Key (Zone 995).
[✳] + [#] or B Key (Zone 999).
[#] + 3 or C Key (Zone 996).

View Downloaded Messages

Press 0 for 5 Seconds.

Display All Zone Descriptors

Press [✳] for 5 Seconds.

Display User Self Help

Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds.

Output Device
Control Commands

Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.
Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.
Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.
Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.
Randomize Output Devices = User Code + [#] + 41
Randomize Output Devices Programmed with Activation Times Between 6 PM and 5
AM = User Code + [#] + 42.
De-activate Randomization = Enter the sequence used to activate randomization.

Test Mode
Commands

Burglary Walk-Test = User Code + 5.
Fire Drill Test = User Code + [#] + 69 (Installer or Master Only).
One-Man Fire Walk-Test = User Code + [#] + 68 (Installer Only)

B-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Scheduling
Commands

Installer-Programmed Schedule Events = Installer Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master
Only).
Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.

Access Control
Commands

Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.
Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.
Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point Number.
Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] + 75 + Access Point + State.
Perform a Test of the VistaKey Module = Installer Code + [#] + 78.
Perform an Access Control Card Function = User Code + [#] + 79.

Panel Linking
Commands

Only user 001 – 050 can perform panel linking.
Activate Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 86.
Exit Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 85.
Activate Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 87.
Exit Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = Enter [0].
Activate Multi-Panel View Mode = User Code + [#] + 88.
Exit Multi-Panel View Mode = Enter [0].

B-2

A P P E N D I X

Specifications
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP CONTROL
Physical:
18"H X 14-1/2"W X 4.3"D
Electrical:
Primary Power:

From ADEMCO No. 1451 Transformer with enclosure; rated 18VAC, 72VA.

Backup Battery:
Alarm Power:
Aux. Standby Pwr
Total Power
Standby Time:

12VDC, 12AH min to 34.4AH max lead acid battery (gel type).
12VDC, 1.7 amps max for each Notification Appliance Circuit.
12VDC, 1 amp max.
Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2.3 amps.
24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205ma aux. Standby load
using 34.4AH battery.
Battery input, auxiliary and Notification Appliance Circuits are protected using PTC
circuit protectors. All outputs are power limited.

Fusing:
Main Dialer
Line Seize:
Ringer Equivalence:
FCC Registration No.:
TLM Threshold

Formats:
Agency Listings:
Burglary:

Fire:

Double Pole
0.7B
AC3-USA-68192-AL-E
Good line when tip-to-ring voltage greater than approximately 25V (13 when blue
jumper cut) or when handset current greater than approximately 10ma. Bad line
when both voltage and current below these levels.
ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO
Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault.
UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station.
UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect.
UL864-NFPA 72 Local, Central Station, and Remote Station

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE
Physical:
2.75”H X 4”W X 1”D
Mounts on VISTA-128FB main PC board shield using standoffs supplied.
Connects to VISTA-128FB main PC board J3 header using ribbon cable supplied.
FCC Registration:
AC3-USA-62628-MO-N
5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE
Physical:
4.5”H X 2.75”W X 1.5”D
Mounts to single-gang electrical box.
Indicators:
AC Power, Comm Failure, Dialer 1 Fault and Dialer 2 Fault.
Connect indicator inputs to VISTA-128FB trigger outputs (J2 header).

C-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Remote Keypads
6139(R)
Physical:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Electrical:
Voltage Input:
Current Drain:
Interface Wiring:
RED:
BLUE:
GREEN:
YELLOW:
BLACK:

C-2

6.25 inches
4.75 inches
1.25 inches
12VDC
100mA
12VDC input (+) auxiliary
power
Not Used
Data to control panel
Data from control panel
Ground and (-) connection from
supplemental power supply

6160CR
Physical:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Electrical:
Voltage Input:
Current Drain:
Interface Wiring:
RED:
BLUE:
GREEN:
YELLOW:
BLACK:

7.437 inches
5.25 inches
1.312 inches
12VDC
150mA
12VDC input (+) auxiliary
power
Not Used
Data to control panel
Data from control panel
Ground and (-) connection from
supplemental power supply

A P P E N D I X

Contact ID and Pager Event Codes
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES
Code
110
111
121
122
123
124
125
131
132
133
134
135
140
142
150
200
301
302
305
306
308
309
310
313
320
321
322
332
333
338
339
342
343
351
352
354
373
378
380
381
382
383
384

Definition
Fire Alarm
Smoke Alarm
Duress
Silent Panic
Audible Panic
Duress Access Grant
Duress Egress Grant
Perimeter Burglary
Interior Burglary
24-Hour Burglary
Entry/Exit Burglary
Day/Night Burglary
ACS Zone Alarm
Polling Loop Short Alarm
24-Hour Auxiliary
Fire Supervisory
AC Loss
Low System Battery
System Reset
Program Tamper
System Shutdown
Battery Test Fail
Ground Fault
System Engineer Reset
ACS Relay Supervision
Bell 1 Trouble
Bell 2 Trouble
Poll Loop Short-Trouble
Expansion Module Failure
ACS Module Low Battery
ACS Module Reset
ACS Module AC Loss
ACS Module Self-Test Fail
Main Dialer Trouble
Backup Dialer Trouble
ACS RS232 Fail
Fire Loop Trouble
Cross Zone Trouble
Trouble (global)
Loss of Supervision (RF)
Loss of RPM Supervision
RPM Sensor Tamper
RF Transmitter Low Battery

Code
385
386
389
401
403
406
407
408
409
411
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
441
451
452
453
454
455
457
459
501
520
521
522
524
551
570
576
577
579
602

Definition
High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal
Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal
Detector Self-Test Failed
O/C by User
Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm
Cancel by User
Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)
Quick Arm
Keyswitch O/C
Callback Requested
Access Denied
Access Granted
Door Force Open
Egress Denied
Egress Granted
Door Prop Open
Access Point DSM Trouble
Access Point RTE Trouble
ACS Program Entry
ACS Program Exit
ACS Threat Change
Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail
Access Point RTE Shunt
Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt
Armed STAY
Early Open/Close
Late Open/Close
Fail to Open
Fail to Close
Auto-Arm Fail
Exit Error by User
Recent Close
ACS Reader Disable
ACS Relay Disable
Bell 1 Bypass
Bell 2 Bypass
Auxiliary Relay Bypass
Main/Backup Dialer Bypass
Bypass
ACS Zone Shunt
ACS Point Bypass
Vent Zone Bypass
Communicator Test

D-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Code
604
606
607
608
611
612
621

Definition
Fire Test
Listen-In to Follow
Burglary Walk-Test
Off-Normal
Fire Walk-Test – Point Tested
Fire Walk-Test – Point Not Tested
Event Log Reset

Code
622
623
624
625
631
632

Definition
Event Log 50% Full
Event Log 90% Full
Event Log Overflow
Time/Date Reset
Exception Schedule Change
Access Schedule Change

Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors
Alpha

Event Description

Alpha

Event Description

FIRE

Fire Alarm

BYPASS

Bypass

DURESS

Duress Alarm

SELF TEST

Self-test

PANIC

Silent or Audible Panic Alarm

TEST ENTRY

Manual Test Entry

BURGLARY

Burglary Alarm

TEST EXIT

Manual Test Exit

EXP SHRT

Polling Loop Short

LOG 50% FULL

Event Log 50% Full

RF EXPND

Expander Module Failure

LOG 90% FULL

Event Log 90% Full

AUXILIARY

Non-burglary Alarm

LOG OVERFLOW

Event Log Overflow

TROUBLE

Trouble

LOG CLEARED

Event Log Cleared

AC LOSS

AC Loss

TIME SET

Time Set

LOW BATTERY

System Low Battery

TIME ERROR

Time Error

SYSTEM RESET

System Reset

PROGRM ENTRY

Program Entry

PROG CHANGE

Program Change

PROGRAM EXIT

Program Exit

BATTERY FAIL

System Battery Failure

Uxxx ADD BY

User XXX Added BY

RF SUPR

RF Supervision

Uxxx DEL BY

User XXX Deleted BY

RPM SUPR

RPM Supervision

Uxxx CHG BY

User XXX Changed BY

RF LBAT

RF Low Battery

PRINTER FAIL

Event Log Printer Failure

EXP TRBL

Expander Module Trouble

PAGER FAILED

Pager Failure

RF TRBL

RF Trouble

TESTED

Zone Tested

TAMPER

Tamper

UNTESTED

Zone Untested

FIRE TRB

Fire Trouble

FAILED

Zone Test Failed

FAIL TO COMM

Failure to Communicate

RLY TRBL

Relay Trouble

BELL TROUBLE

Bell Trouble

EXP TMPR

Expansion Module Tamper

DISARMED

Disarmed

VENT BYPASS

Vent Zone Bypass

DISARMED-REM

Disarmed Remotely

RF JAM

RF Jam Detected

DISARMED-KEY

Disarmed Via RF Key

JAM RSTR

RF Jam Restore

DISARM-AUTO

Auto-Disarm

FIRE RST

Fire Alarm Restore

CALL BACK

Callback Requested

DURE RST

Duress Alarm Restore

CANCEL

Cancel

PNC RST

Panic Alarm Restore

DISRMD-EARLY

Disarmed Early

BURG RST

Burglary Alarm Restore

DISRMD-LATE

Disarmed Late

EXP RST

Expansion Module Restore

MISSED DISRM

Missed Disarm

RF RST

RF Restore

SKED CHANGE

Schedule Change

AUX RST

Auxiliary Restore

ACC SKED CHG

Access Control Schedule Change

MED RST

Medical Restore

ARM FAILED

Failed to Arm

TRBL RST

Trouble Restore

DIALER SHUT

Dialer Shutdown

AC RESTORE

AC Restore

SYSTEM SHUT

System Shutdown

LOW BATT RST

System Low Battery Restore

D-2

Appendix D – Contact ID and Pager Event Codes
Alpha

Event Description

Alpha

Event Description

EXITED

Egress Granted

Program Change

ACLO MOD

AC Loss at Module

BAT TST FAIL

Battery Test Failure

LBAT MOD

Low Battery at Module

RPM RST

RPM Restore

COMM MOD

Comm Failure from MLB to Module

RFLB RST

RF Low Battery Restore

RES MOD

Access Control Module Reset

EXP RST

Expansion Module Failure Restore

ACPT RLY

Access Point Relay Supervision Fail

TMPR RST

Tamper Restore

SELF MOD

Module Self-Test Failure

FRTR RST

Fire Trouble Restore

ACZN CHG

Access Control Zone Change

COMM RESTORE

Communication Restore

ACS PROG

Access Control Program Entry

RLY RST

ECP Relay Trouble Restore

ACS PRGX

Access Control Program Exit

ARMED

Armed

THRT CHG

Access Control Threat Change

ARMED-STAY

Armed Stay

SYS SHUT

System Shutdown

ARMED-REM

Armed Remotely

SYS RST

System Engineer Reset

ARMED-QUICK

Quick Armed

ZN SHUNT

Access Control Zone Shunt

ARMED-KEY

Armed Via RF Key

ZN ALARM

Access Control Zone Alarm

ARMED-AUTO

Auto-Armed

RDR DISA

Access Control Reader Disable

PARTIAL ARM

Partial Armed

RLY DISA

Access Control Relay/Trigger Disable

ARMED-EARLY

Armed Early

RTE TRBL

Request to Exit Point Trouble

ARMED-LATE

Armed Late

DSM TRBL

Door Status Monitor Point Trouble

MISSED ARM

Missed Arm

DUR EXIT

Duress Egress Grant

DIALER RST

Dialer Restore (Shutdown)

BGN ACS TEST

Access Control Test Mode Start

SYSTEM RST

System Restore (Shutdown)

MOD RST

VGM/Access Control Module Restore

BYP RST

Bypass Restore

ACPT RST

Access Point Restore

TEST EXIT

Test Mode Exit

ACRST MOD

AC Loss at Module Restore

PRINTER RSTR

Printer Restore

LBAT RST

Low Battery at Module Restore

PAGER RSTR

Pager Restore

COMM RST

Comm Fail MLB to Module Restore

BELL RESTORE

Bell Restore

RLY RST

Access Point Relay Supervision Rest

EXIT ERR

Exit Error

SELF RST

Self-Test at Module Restore

RECENT ARM

Recent Arm

ACPT UNB

Access Point Unbypass

VENT BYP RST

Vent Zone Bypass Restore

DSM UNSH

Door Status Monitor Unshunt

Access Control Events

RTE UNSH

Request to Exit Point Unshunt

ACS MOD

VGM/Access Control Module Failure

DRFO RST

Door Forced Open Restore

ACS PNT

Access Point Failure

DRPO RST

Door Propped Open Restore

DSM SHNT

Door Status Monitor Shunt

DSM RST

Door Status Monitor Trouble Restore

DUR ACCS

Duress Access Grant

RTE RST

Request to Exit Point Trouble Rest

NO ENTRY

Access Denied

RLY ENAB

Access Control Relay/Trigger Enable

DR OPEN

Door Propped Open

RDR ENAB

Access Control Reader Enable

DR FORCE

Door Forced Open

ZNAL RST

Access Control Zone Restore

ENTERED

Access Granted

ZN UNSHT

Access Control Zone Unshunt

NO EXIT

Egress Denied

SYSHTRST

System Shutdown Restore

ACPT BYP

Access Point Bypass

END ACS TEST

Access Control Test Mode End

RTE SHNT

Request to Exit Shunt

RESET
PROG CHANGE

D-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

D-4

Index
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
#93 Menu Mode Programming ...................................... 4-2
ADEMCO Contact ID.............................................. 3-6, 3-7
#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands................... 4-4
ADEMCO CONTACT ID................................................C-1
12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format .................................. 5-11
ADEMCO HIGH SPEED ...............................................C-1
1361 ............................................................................ 3-30
ADEMCO Low Speed.................................................... 3-7
1451 Transformer..........................................................C-1
ADEMCO LOW SPEED ................................................C-1
24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07..................................... 4-6
Affects Lobby ......................................................... 2-2, 5-7
24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 ................................... 4-6
Agency Listings .............................................................C-1
24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06........................................ 4-6
Agency Statements ....................................................... A-1
2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors ............... 3-10, 3-11
Alarm Activation ............................................................ 3-5
2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8
Alarm Output Current Load ................................ 3-32, 3-33
333 PRM ....................................................................... 3-9
Alarm Output Supervision ............................................. 3-4
4100SM Serial Module .................................................. 7-4
Alarm Power..................................................................C-1
4101SN Relay Modules............................................... 3-18
Allow Disarm Outside Window if Alarm Occurs........... 5-12
4197 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13
Allow Disarming Only During Arm/Disarm Windows ... 5-12
4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules ............................... 3-17
Alpha Pager Module............................................. 3-23, 4-8
4285/4286 VIP Module................................................ 3-27
ALPHA PROG ............................................................... 4-3
4297 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13
Antenna Fault.............................................................. 3-22
4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset....................................... 3-6
Arm/Disarm Commands ................................................ 6-8
4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8
Arm-Away Type 21........................................................ 4-7
5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE .........................C-1
Arms Lobby ............................................................ 2-2, 5-7
5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE ............................C-1
Arm-STAY Type 20 ....................................................... 4-7
5800 Series Transmitters ............................................ 3-16
Audio Alarm Verification Module ................................. 3-27
5800TM Module .......................................................... 3-16
Auto Arming .................................................................. 6-1
5869 ..................................................................... 1-2, 3-14
Auto Disarming.............................................................. 6-1
5881ENHC ........................................................... 1-2, 3-14
Auto-Arm Delay.................................................... 5-12, 6-1
6139 ..............................................................................C-2
Auto-Arm Warning......................................................... 6-1
7720 ............................................................................ 3-23
Auto-Arm Warning Period ........................................... 5-12
7720ULF...................................................................... 3-23
Auto-Disarm Delay ...................................................... 5-12
7920SE........................................................................ 3-23
Aux. Standby Pwr..........................................................C-1
Auxiliary Power Current Load...................................... 3-32
Auxiliary Relay Connections.......................................... 3-5

AAV ............................................................................. 3-27
ABB1031 ....................................................................... 3-4
AC 60Hz or 50Hz ........................................................ 5-10
AC Loss Keypad Sounding............................................ 5-2
Access Group............................................................... 9-3
Access Control ............................................ 3-25, 3-26, 4-9
Access Control Commands ....................................6-8, B-2
Access Control Dialer Enables ...................................... 5-9
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point............................ 4-9
Access Control of Lighting and Appliances ................. 4-10
Access Control Using RF Transmitter ........................... 4-9
ACCESS GRP PGM...................................................... 4-3
ACCESS POINT PGM................................................... 4-3
Access Point Type 27.................................................... 4-7
Access Relay Number................................................. 5-11
Access Schedules ......................................................... 6-5
Action Code................................................................... 6-8
Action Specifier ............................................................. 6-8
Activation Time.............................................................. 6-8
Adding a User Code ...................................................... 9-3
Adding an RF Key to a User Code ................................ 9-4
Addressing the Keypads................................................ 3-3
ADEMCO 4+2 Express.................................................. 3-7
ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS..............................................C-1
ADEMCO 4146............................................................ 3-19
ADEMCO 685 receiver.................................................. 3-7
ADEMCO 685 Receiver............................................... 3-27
Ademco AB12. .............................................................. 3-1

B
Backup Battery..............................................................C-1
Battery Capacity Worksheet........................................ 3-34
Battery Selection Table ............................................... 3-34
Battery Test................................................................. 10-1
Burglary Alarm Communicator Delay ............................ 5-7
Burglary or RS232 Input................................................ 5-2
Burglary Trigger for Response Type 8 .......................... 5-3
Burglary Walk Test...................................................... 10-2
Button RF .................................................................... 3-16
Button RF (BR) Type 05................................................ 4-8
Bypass Commands ....................................................... 6-8

C
California State Fire Marshal......................................... A-2
Call Waiting Defeat...................................................... 5-10
Callback ........................................................................ 7-3
Callback Requested ...................................................... 7-1
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS...................... A-4
Cancel Verify................................................................. 5-7
Changing a User Code.................................................. 9-4
Check Messages......................................................... 10-4
Checksum Verification................................................... 5-5
Code + TEST [5] ................................................ 10-1, 10-2
COMM FAILURE......................................................... 10-4

Index-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Common Lobby ............................................................. 2-1
Communication Defaults ............................................... 4-5
Communicator Split Reporting Selection....................... 5-9
Compass Downloading Software .................................. 7-4
COMPASS downloading software................................. 7-1
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................ 3-8
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ..................... 3-8, 3-9
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters ......................... 3-17
Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices............................ 3-4
Compatible Glass Break Detectors ............................. 3-11
Confirmation of Arming Ding ......................................... 5-2
Console Input (CS) Type 09 .......................................... 4-8
Contact ID ..................................................................... 1-3
CONTACT ID EVENT CODES......................................D-1
Contacting Technical Support ..................................... 10-5
Control Unit Power Supply Load ................................. 3-31
Conventions Used in This Manual................................... vii
Cross Zoning Pair Four ................................................. 5-8
Cross Zoning Pair One.................................................. 5-8
Cross Zoning Pair Three ............................................... 5-8
Cross Zoning Pair Two .................................................. 5-8
Cross-Zoning................................................................. 5-8
CUSTOM INDEX........................................................... 4-3

D
Data Encryption............................................................. 7-1
Data Field Descriptions ................................................. 5-1
Data Field Programming Mode...................................... 4-1
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Month........................ 5-11
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Weekend.......... 5-12, 5-17
Deleting a User Code .................................................... 9-5
DEVICE PROG ............................................................. 4-3
Dial Tone Detection....................................................... 5-4
Dial Tone Pause............................................................ 5-4
Dialer Test ................................................................... 10-1
DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR .........................................C-1
DIP Switch Loop (DP) Type 07...................................... 4-8
Direct-Wire Downloading............................................... 7-4
Disable Download Callback......................................... 5-10
Disarm Delay................................................................. 6-1
Disarm Type 22 ............................................................. 4-7
Display Burglary & Panic Alarms for Other Partitions.. 5-13
Display Fire Alarms of Other Partitions ....................... 5-13
Display Troubles of Other Partitions............................ 5-13
Door Status Monitor (DSM) Type 11 ............................. 4-8
Download Command Enables ....................................... 5-4
Download ID Number .................................................... 5-4
Download Phone Number ............................................. 5-4
Downloading.................................................................. 7-1
Downloading Access Security ....................................... 7-1
Downloading Requirements .......................................... 7-1
Dual Reporting .............................................................. 5-5
Duress Codes Level 6 ................................................... 9-2
Duress Reporting .......................................................... 9-2
Dynamic Signaling Delay...................................... 3-21, 5-6
Dynamic Signaling Priority.................................... 3-21, 5-6

Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm ............................ 5-11
Enable Dialer Reports for Panics & Duress................... 5-6
Enable GOTO for this Partition.................................... 5-12
Enable J7 Triggers for Partition................................... 5-13
Enable Open/Close Report for Installer Code ............... 5-4
Enable Open/Close report for Keyswitch....................... 5-4
Enable Random Timers For Partitions 1-8 .................... 5-1
Entering Programming Mode ........................................ 4-1
Entry Delay #1............................................................... 5-2
Entry Delay #2............................................................... 5-2
Entry Warning ............................................................... 5-6
Entry/Exit #1 Type 01 .................................................... 4-6
Entry/Exit #2 Type 02 .................................................... 4-6
Event Log ........................................................... 3-27, 4-10
Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors .......................D-2
Event Log Printer On-Line Mode................................. 5-11
Event Log Types ......................................................... 5-11
Event Logging Commands ............................................ B-1
EVENT/ACTION PGM............................................ 4-3, 4-4
Exception Reports ......................................................... 6-2
Exit Delay #1 ................................................................. 5-2
Exit Delay #2 ................................................................. 5-2
Exit Delay Sounding .................................................... 5-10
Exit Error ....................................................................... 1-2
Exit Error Logic Enable.................................................. 5-7
Exiting the User Edit Mode............................................ 9-5
EXPERT MODE ............................................................ 4-3
Extend Closing Window ................................................ 6-1
External Sounders......................................................... 3-4

F
FCC Part 15 STATEMENT............................................ A-3
FCC PART 68 NOTICE................................................. A-3
FCC REGISTRATION NO.............................................C-1
Fire With Verification Type 16 ....................................... 4-7
First Communication ..................................................... 7-3
First Test Report Time................................................... 5-6
Force Arm ..................................................................... 6-1
Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm .................................. 5-12
Frwd. Power Loss........................................................ 3-22
FSA Modules............................................................... 3-18
Fusing ...........................................................................C-1

G
General Description....................................................... 1-1
General Purpose (GP) Type 13..................................... 4-8
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel............................ 7-2
Global Arm ? ................................................................. 9-3
Go/No Go Test Mode .................................................. 10-1
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing ............................ 3-1
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing.................... 3-2
Grade A Service............................................................ A-2
Grade AA Service.......................................................... A-2

H
E
Early Power Detect...................................................... 3-22
Earth Ground............................................................... 3-31
ECP Wire Run ............................................................. 3-20
Enable 5800 RF Button Force Arm ............................. 5-11

Index-2

Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones ...................... 1-1
Hardwired (HW) Type 01............................................... 4-7
Holiday Schedule Programming.................................... 6-7
Holiday Schedules........................................... 6-3, 6-4, 6-6
House ID Sniffer Mode ................................................ 3-16
How to Use Panel Linking ............................................. B-2

Index
I

Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper .................................... 5-3
Installer (User 1) Code Level 0...................................... 9-1
Installer Code ................................................................ 5-1
Installer Unattended Program Mode.............................. 7-2
Installing RPM Devices................................................ 3-12
Installing The Control .................................................... 3-1
Installing the Control's Circuit Board.............................. 3-2
Intelligent Test Report ................................................... 5-3
Interior w/Delay Type 10................................................ 4-7
Interior, Follower Type 04.............................................. 4-6

No Alarm Response Type 23 ........................................ 4-7
Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 2-8).......................... 5-4
Number of Partitions.................................................... 5-11

K
Keypad Panic Enables .................................................. 5-3
Keypads ........................................................................ 2-1
Keyswitch .................................................................... 3-19
Keyswitch Assignment................................................... 5-2
Keyswitch Tamper....................................................... 3-19

L
Limitation of Access Schedules............................ 6-2, 6-11
Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming............ 6-11
LINE SEIZE ...................................................................C-1
List of Figures................................................................... vi
LO BAT........................................................................ 10-4
Lobby Partition .............................................................. 5-7
Long Range Radio Central Station #1 Category
Enable ....................................................................... 5-6
Long Range Radio Central Station #2 Category
Enable ....................................................................... 5-6
Long Range Radio ECP ..................................... 3-21, 4-10
Long Range Radio to J7 Triggers................................ 3-23
Low Speed Format (Primary) ........................................ 5-5
Low Speed Format (Secondary).................................... 5-5
LRR Battery................................................................. 3-22
LRR CRC is bad.......................................................... 3-22
LRR reporting options ................................................. 3-22
LRR Trouble Messages............................................... 3-22

M
Main Logic Board ........................................................ 3-26
Main Logic Board Supervision Type 28 ......................... 4-7
Manager Codes Level 2 ................................................ 9-1
Master Codes Level 1 ................................................... 9-1
Master Keypad .............................................................. 2-3
MODEM COMM ................................................... 7-1, 10-4
Modems......................................................................... 7-1
Momentary Exit Type 29................................................ 4-7
Mounting The Control Cabinet....................................... 3-1
Multi-Access ? ............................................................... 9-3
Multi-Panel View Mode.................................................. 2-7
Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode.................................... 2-6
Multiple Alarms.............................................................. 5-3
Multiple Partition Access ............................................... 9-2

O
OC or OPEN CIRCUIT .................................................. 3-3
Off-Normal Report....................................................... 10-4
On-Line Control Functions ............................................ 7-3
Open/Close Reporting................................................... 9-2
Open/Close Reports by Exception ....................... 5-12, 6-3
Open/Close Schedule ................................................... 6-3
Open/Close Schedule Programming............................. 6-6
Open/Close Schedules........................................... 6-4, 6-5
Open/Close Windows.................................................... 6-8
Operator Access Levels ................................................ 7-1
Operator Codes Levels 3-5 ........................................... 9-1
Output Device Control Commands................................ B-1
Output Devices............................................................ 3-17
OUTPUT PGM .............................................................. 4-3
Overvoltage Protection.................................................. 3-7

P
PABX Access Code....................................................... 5-3
Pager 1 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-13
Pager 1 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-13
Pager 1 Format ........................................................... 5-13
Pager 1 ID Number ..................................................... 5-13
Pager 1 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14
Pager 1 Phone Number............................................... 5-13
Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables .......................... 5-14, 5-17
Pager 2 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-14
Pager 2 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-14
Pager 2 Format ........................................................... 5-14
Pager 2 ID Number ..................................................... 5-14
Pager 2 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14
Pager 2 Phone Number............................................... 5-14
Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-14
Pager 3 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-14
Pager 3 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-14
Pager 3 Format ........................................................... 5-14
Pager 3 ID Number ..................................................... 5-14
Pager 3 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14
Pager 3 Phone Number............................................... 5-14
Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15
Pager 4 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-15
Pager 4 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-15
Pager 4 Format ........................................................... 5-15
Pager 4 ID Number ..................................................... 5-15
Pager 4 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-15
Pager 4 Phone Number............................................... 5-15
Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15
Pager 5 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-15
Pager 5 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-15
Pager 5 Format ........................................................... 5-15
Pager 5 ID Number ..................................................... 5-15
Pager 5 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-15
Pager 5 Phone Number............................................... 5-15
Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15
Pager 6 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-16
Pager 6 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-16

Index-3

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide
Pager 6 Format ........................................................... 5-16
Pager 6 ID Number ..................................................... 5-16
Pager 6 Partition Enable.............................................. 5-16
Pager 6 Phone Number............................................... 5-16
Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-16
Pager 7 Delay 1......................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-18
Pager 7 Delay 2......................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-19
Pager 7 Format ......................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-18
Pager 7 ID Number ................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-18
Pager 7 Partition Enable............................ 5-16, 5-17, 5-19
Pager 7 Phone Number............................. 5-16, 5-17, 5-18
Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables ................. 5-16, 5-17, 5-19
Pager 8 Delay 1.................................................. 5-17, 5-18
Pager 8 Delay 2.................................................. 5-17, 5-18
Pager 8 Format .................................................. 5-17, 5-18
Pager 8 ID Number ............................................ 5-16, 5-18
Pager 8 Partition Enable..................................... 5-17, 5-18
Pager 8 Phone Number............................. 5-16, 5-17, 5-19
Pager Format .............................................................. 3-23
Pager Installed ............................................................ 5-13
Paging Service ............................................................ 3-23
Panel Link Module................................................ 2-4, 3-20
Panel Link Module Supervision ..................................... 2-5
Panel Linking.......................................................... 2-4, 4-8
Panel Linking Commands.............................................. B-2
panel linking users.................................................. 2-5, 9-1
Panic Button or Speedkey ............................................. 5-9
Partitioned System ........................................................ 2-1
Partitioning ............................................................. 1-2, 2-1
PassPoint Access Control (ACS) Type 10..................... 4-8
PassPoint Access Control System .............................. 3-26
PassPoint Dialer Events ................................................ 4-9
Perimeter Type 03......................................................... 4-6
Peripherals Devices ...................................................... 1-2
Permanent Keypad Display Backlighting..................... 5-10
Phone Module Access Code ......................................... 5-2
PLL out of Lock ........................................................... 3-22
PLM ............................................................................... 2-4
polling loop .................................................................. 3-12
Polling Loop Current Draw .......................................... 3-32
Polling Loop Supervision............................................. 3-13
Power Failure .............................................................. 10-4
Power Unattained........................................................ 3-22
Power-Up in Previous State .......................................... 5-3
Prevent Zone XXX Bypass ............................................ 5-4
Primary Format.............................................................. 5-5
Primary Phone Number................................................. 5-4
Primary Subscriber’s Account Number.......................... 5-3
Printer Baud Rate........................................................ 5-11
Printer Configurations.................................................. 3-27
Printer Type................................................................. 5-11
Priority of Displays for Panel Linking ............................. 2-7
Program Modes............................................................. 4-1
Programming Commands.............................................. B-1
PROGRAMMING COMMANDS .................................... 4-1
Programming Entry Errors............................................. 4-2
Programming Overview ................................................. 4-1
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields .................. 4-2
Programming Scheduling Options................................. 6-4
Programming System-Wide Data Fields........................ 4-2

Q
Quick Arm............................................................... 5-3, 9-1
Quick Exit ...................................................................... 5-1

Index-4

R
Random time................................................................. 6-8
Randomize AC Loss Report.......................................... 5-2
RCVR SETUP ERROR ............................................... 10-4
Real-Time Clock............................................................ 8-1
Recent Close................................................................. 1-2
Refresh Feature ............................................................ 6-7
Regulatory Agency Statements ..................................... A-1
Relay commands........................................................... 6-8
Relay Timeout XXX Minutes ....................................... 5-11
Relay Timeout YYY Seconds ...................................... 5-11
REPORT CODE PROG ................................................ 4-3
Reporting Formats......................................................... 3-7
Request to Exit (RTE) Type 12 ..................................... 4-8
Restore Report Timing .................................................. 5-7
Restrict Disarming......................................................... 6-1
RF Motion.................................................................... 3-16
RF Motion (RM) Type 02............................................... 4-7
RF Receiver Supervision Check-in Interval................... 5-9
RF System Installation Advisories ............................... 3-15
RF System Operation and Supervision ....................... 3-14
RF Transmitter Check-in Interval .................................. 5-9
RF Transmitter Low Battery Reporting .......................... 5-9
RF Transmitter Low Battery Sound ............................... 5-9
Ring Count .................................................................... 7-2
Ring Detection Count .................................................... 5-5
RINGER EQUIVALENCE..............................................C-1
RJ31X ........................................................................... 3-7
RJ31X jack .................................................................. 3-28
RLY VOICE DESCR...................................................... 4-3
RS-485 .......................................................................... 2-4
RS-485 Bus................................................................. 3-21
RTE ............................................................................... 4-8

S
Scheduled Check-in ...................................................... 7-3
Scheduled Download .................................................... 7-3
Scheduling .................................................................... 6-1
Scheduling Commands ................................................. B-2
Scheduling Menu Mode................................................. 6-4
Scheduling Menu Structure ........................................... 6-4
Secondary Format......................................................... 5-5
Secondary Phone Number ............................................ 5-4
Secondary Subscriber Account Number ....................... 5-7
Send Cancel If Alarm + Off.......................................... 5-10
Send Message to Pager After Dialer........................... 5-13
serial number devices ................................................. 3-13
Serial Number Polling Loop (DS) Type 08 .................... 4-8
Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) Type 06 ..................... 4-8
SESCOA .......................................................................C-1
Sescoa/Radionics.......................................................... 3-7
Sescoa/Radionics Select............................................... 5-5
Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode............................... 2-5
Smoke Detector Reset ................................................ 3-20
Specifications ................................................................C-1
Standard/Expanded Reporting Primary......................... 5-5
Standard/Expanded Reporting Secondary .................... 5-5
Standby Battery Size................................................... 3-33
Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09 ............. 4-7
Supervised RF ............................................................ 3-16
Supervised RF (RF) Type 03 ........................................ 4-8
Supervision Pulses for LRR ........................................ 5-13

Index
Supervisory Messages ................................................ 10-4
Supplementary Power Supply ....................................... 3-3
Suppress Transmitter Supervision Sound ................... 5-10
Swinger Suppression .................................................... 5-6
System Commands ....................................................... B-1
System Communication................................................. 1-3
System Events Notify .................................................... 5-1
SYSTEM LO BAT........................................................ 10-4
System LoBat”............................................................. 10-1
System Messages ....................................................... 10-4
System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module .............. 3-9
System Sensor MA 12/24D ........................................... 3-4
System Sensor P12575................................................. 3-4

Unattended Mode.......................................................... 5-5
Unsupervised RF......................................................... 3-16
Unsupervised RF (UR) Type 04 .................................... 4-8
Use Partition Descriptor .............................................. 5-12
User Access Codes....................................................... 9-1
User Code Authority Levels........................................... 9-1
User Code Commands.................................................. B-1
user code defaults ......................................................... 9-1
User Code Rules ........................................................... 9-2
User Scheduling Menu Mode ...................................... 6-13
Users............................................................................. 2-1
Using ACS Zone Inputs................................................. 4-9

V
T
Tamper Supervision .................................................... 3-11
TAP protocol................................................................ 3-23
Telephone Line Connections......................................... 3-7
TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS ................. A-3
TeleSmart...................................................................... 4-8
Temporary Schedule ..................................................... 6-3
Temporary Schedules ................................................. 6-12
Temporary Schedules Programming........................... 6-13
Test Report Interval....................................................... 5-3
Testing The System .................................................... 10-1
Time Driven Events ....................................................... 6-2
Time Driven Events Worksheet ..................................... 6-7
Time to Delay Pager After Dialer................................. 5-13
Time Window Definitions ............................................... 6-2
Time Windows........................................................ 6-4, 6-5
Time Windows Programming ........................................ 6-5
Timed Events ................................................................ 6-4
Time-Driven Event Programming .................................. 6-9
Time-Driven Events....................................................... 6-7
Time-Driven Events Programming ................................ 6-7
TouchTone or Rotary Dial ............................................. 5-3
TouchTone with Rotary Backup .................................... 5-9
Transformer Connections ............................................ 3-30
Transmitter Battery Life ............................................... 3-17
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode ........................................ 10-1
Transmitter Input Types............................................... 3-16
Transmitter Supervision............................................... 3-16
Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05........................ 4-6
Trouble Conditions ...................................................... 10-4
Trouble Messages....................................................... 10-4
Trouble/Supervisory Activation...................................... 3-6
Turning the System Over to the User .......................... 10-5

U
UL Installation Requirements ........................................ A-1
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm............ A-2
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local
Mercantile Safe & Vault ............................................. A-1
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ............. A-2
UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire. A-1
UL864/NFPA Local Fire................................................. A-1
UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION ........................ 2-2
Unattended Download................................................... 7-1

VA8200 ................................................................ 2-4, 3-20
VA8201 ....................................................................... 3-23
View Capabilities ........................................................... 9-1
VIP Module.................................................................. 3-27
VIP Module Phone Code............................................... 5-2
Vista Gateway Module ................................................ 3-26
VISTA Gateway Module ................................................ 4-9
VISTA-128B Plus as Stand-Alone Access Control...... 4-10
VISTA-128B PLUS Current Load ................................ 3-33
VistaKey ............................................................... 3-25, 4-9
VistaKey Dialer Enables................................................ 4-9

W
Wire Run Length ......................................................... 3-20
Wire Run Length/Gauge................................................ 3-3
Wireless Keypad Assignment...................................... 5-10
Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect................................. 5-10
Wireless System Commands ........................................ B-1
Wireless Zone Expansion............................................ 3-14
Wiring Devices to Zones 1-9 ......................................... 3-8
Wiring the Alarm Output ................................................ 3-4
Wiring the Keypads ....................................................... 3-3
Worksheets to calculate the total current .................... 3-31
World Wide Web Address ........................................... 10-5

Y
Yuasa .......................................................................... 3-34

Z
Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification.................................. 5-11
Zone 804 ..................................................................... 3-28
Zone Defaults................................................................ 4-4
Zone Index .................................................................... 4-4
Zone Input Type Definitions .......................................... 4-7
Zone Number Designations........................................... 4-4
ZONE PROG............................................................ vii, 4-3
Zone Response Type Definitions .................................. 4-6
Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 1-8....................... 5-6
Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 9, 10 and 16........ 5-6
Zones ............................................................................ 2-1

Index-5

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Index-6

WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or
other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons. For example:
• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or
disconnect an alarm warning device.
• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in
properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.
• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if
the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the
Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may
not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not
sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No
smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by
carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable
materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire
and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning
to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their
installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams
of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion
or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.
Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical
system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the
ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection
performance can decrease.
• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the
other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear
the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.
Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to
last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This
alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad
(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device
being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all
reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,
thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute
for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and
continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm
systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries
and affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in
conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship
under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not
having an ADEMCO date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation
instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's
obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any
product which is proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or
workmanship under normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or
otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory
service. For warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to ADEMCO Factory Service, 170
Michael Drive, Syosset, New York 11791.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE
FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR
DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.
Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the
products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the
products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly
installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events
occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that
there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A
CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE,
WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM
LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, WHICH
SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces
any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration,
written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.

NOTES

VISTA-128FBP Summary of Connections Diagram

RED

OUTPUT

NOTES

See instructions on setting
addresses & for max # of keypads
and wire run length restrictions.
Keypad color subject to approval
of local authority.

NOTE 3:

2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7

NOTE 2:

The combined standby current
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2
and polling loop cannot exceed
1.0A.The combined alarm current
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux
pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and
bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A.

NOTE 1:

BELL

BELL 2

2 3 4

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT
THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER

6 7 8

BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK
VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)
INTACT: 25V
CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH
GROUND SCREW
(wire to main PCB
terminal #30)

(connect using supplied cable)
Supervision is programmable

BACK-UP PHONE JACK
SEE TELCO
JACK SHOCK
RJ31X
WARNING
BELOW

N.O.
2k

N.C.

ZONE 4

N.O.

N.C.

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

N.O.

N.C.

ZONE 7

N.O.

N.C.

VISTA-128FBP
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

N.O.

6 7 8

Connect
RJ31X using
cable supplied.
Supervision is
programmable

WARNING:
TO PREVENT
RISK OF
ELECTRICAL
SHOCK,
DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK
BEFORE
SERVICING
THIS PANEL

PHONE JACK

RJ31X

MAIN

V128FBP-SOC-V0

EARTH GROUND
See instructions for
proper earth ground
connections

TO OTHER DEVICES
Polling Loop
Ratings:
(supervised)
128mA max. See note 1.
See instructions for
compatible devices
and for max wire
run length

4208U

4192SD
SMOKE

4209U

POLLING
LOOP

W6
(BLUE)

The VISTA-250 Main Dialer
Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
FCC Reg. No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

N.C.

GLASS
BREAK

2 3 4

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

ZONE 8

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM
SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEADQUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION
SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH
THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL
SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.

Make connections using
4142TR cable (not supplied)
MAIN TLM ON HOOK
VOLTAGE THRESHOLD
INTACT:25V
CUT: 13V

VOLTAGE
TRIGGERS
(not supervised)

J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS
See instructions for trigger use and programming
(default functions shown)
1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)
2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)
3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)
4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)
5. OUT 2 (FIRE)
6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)
7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)
8. GROUND
9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)
RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:
LOW: 2K TO GROUND
HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX
OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND
HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K

ZONE 1-8 NOTES
• All zones provide Style B supervision
• Ratings for zones 1,2:
- 10 - 14VDC
• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):
- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max
- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors
- Other zones: 300 ohms max
of the type specified in the instructions
• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)
can be used)
• UL compatibility ID: A
Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.
N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

2k (note 2)

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.
N.C.

ZONE 3

N.O.

SMOKE

N.O.

SMOKE

ZONE 2

ZONE 1

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

J4 KEYPAD PORT #2
See instr. regarding port #2 use
1. GROUND (to keypad black wire)
4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire)
5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire)
Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,
400mA max. See note 1
7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire)

MAIN PCB SHIELD

Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPADS:
6139, 6139R
6160, 6160R
SEE NOTE 3

KEYPAD PORT #1

Make connections using
4142TR cable (supplied)
(not supervised)

KEYPAD PORT #2

AUX RELAY (FORM C)
programmable response
(not supervised)
HORN
HORN
Contact Rating:
28V, 2.8A
AUXILIARY POWER #1
resistive loads
Rating: 10 - 14VDC
1.0A MAX (STANDBY)
2k (note 2)
2k
1.7A MAX (ALARM)
See note 1.
ALARM POLARITY SHOWN
(not supervised)

BELL

BELL 1

AUX. RELAY

W4
(WHITE)

BELL OUTPUTS

W1
(WHITE)

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS
INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR
CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used)
BELL 1
BELL 2

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED
DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED

Each output may be selected for
Style Y supervision or no supervision
(See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and
#93 Menu Mode.
FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.
Use polarized sounding devices.
BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd.
EOLRs not req'd. May use non
polarized devices.
Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max.
See note 1, see instructions
for compatible devices.
For commercial fire, bell timeout
must be a minimum of 6 minutes.

TRNSFMR

TRANSFORMER
W/ENCLOSURE
ADEMCO No.1451 WH
BLACK
(supplied)
INPUT: 120VAC,
INPUT
60HZ,
1.0A max. Connect to a
dedicated circuit.
OUTPUT: 18VAC
72VA

AC WIRING IS
SUPERVISED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE
TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:
ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max
lead acid batteries using cables supplied.
See instructions for required capacity.
Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery
normally need not be replaced for
at least 3 yrs.

N.O
.

BLK

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP

BATTERY TABS

Connect to main PCB
header J3 using ribbon
cable (supplied)

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP

CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR
DELAY-SEC MODEL DELAY-SEC
(ZONE)

Data in

Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using
4 standoffs (supplied)
The 5140DLM Dialer
Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
BACK-UP LINE SEIZE
FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N
LED (GREEN)
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

PROGRAMMABLE
AS TAMPER LOOP

WARNING:
THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO
INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION
FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY
OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM
THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE
TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS
SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED
60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING
DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO
THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY
THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING
JURISDICTION.

Data out

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

PROGRAMMABLE
AS KEYSWITCH LOOP

This equipment should be
installed in accordance
with the National Fire
Protection Association's
Standard 72 (National
Fire Protection Assoc.,
Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA. 02269). Printed
information describing proper
installation, operation,
testing, maintenance and
repair service is to be
provided with this equipment.

N.C
.
S
P
PO ARE
WR AU
#1 X

TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE:
Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).
UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.
Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK
DETECTOR LOOP

VISTA-250FBP Summary of Connections Diagram
RED

BL
BL

OUTPUT

NOTES

See instructions on setting
addresses & for max # of keypads
and wire run length restrictions.
Keypad color subject to approval
of local authority.

NOTE 3:

2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7

NOTE 2:

NOTE 1:

BELL

BELL 2

2 3 4

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT
THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER

6 7 8

BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK
VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)
INTACT: 25V
CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH
GROUND SCREW
(wire to main PCB
terminal #30)

(connect using supplied cable)
Supervision is programmable

BACK-UP PHONE JACK
SEE TELCO
JACK SHOCK
RJ31X
WARNING
BELOW

N.O.
2k

N.C.

ZONE 4

N.O.

N.C.

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

N.O.

N.C.

ZONE 7

N.O.

N.C.

VISTA-250FBP
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

N.O.

N.C.

GLASS
BREAK

2 3 4

6 7 8

WARNING:
TO PREVENT
RISK OF
ELECTRICAL
SHOCK,
DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK
BEFORE
SERVICING
THIS PANEL

PHONE JACK

Connect
RJ31X using
cable supplied.
Supervision is
programmable

The VISTA-250 Main Dialer
Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
FCC Reg. No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

V250FBP-SOC-V0

EARTH GROUND
See instructions for
proper earth ground
connections

TO OTHER DEVICES
Polling Loop
Ratings:
(supervised)
128mA max. See note 1.
See instructions for
compatible devices
and for max wire
run length

4208U

4192SD
SMOKE

4209U

POLLING
LOOP

RJ31X

MAIN

W6
(BLUE)
J3

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

ZONE 8

Make connections using
4142TR cable (not supplied)
MAIN TLM ON HOOK
VOLTAGE THRESHOLD
INTACT:25V
CUT: 13V

VOLTAGE
TRIGGERS
(not supervised)

ZONE 1-8 NOTES
• Ratings for zones 1,2:
• All zones provide Style B supervision
- 10 - 14VDC
• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):
- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors
- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max
of the type specified in the instructions
- Other zones: 300 ohms max
• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)
can be used)
• UL compatibility ID: A
Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.
N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

2k (note 2)

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.
N.C.

ZONE 3

N.O.

SMOKE

N.O.

+
SMOKE

ZONE 2

ZONE 1

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

MAIN PCB SHIELD

Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPADS:
6139, 6139R
6160, 6160R
SEE NOTE 3

KEYPAD PORT #1

Make connections using
4142TR cable (supplied)
(not supervised)

KEYPAD PORT #2

BELL

BELL 1

AUX. RELAY

W4
(WHITE)

BELL OUTPUTS

W1
(WHITE)

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS
INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR
CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used)
BELL 1
BELL 2

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED
DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED

TRNSFMR

TRANSFORMER
W/ENCLOSURE
ADEMCO No.1451 WH
BLACK
(supplied)
INPUT: 120VAC,
INPUT
60HZ,
1.0A max. Connect to a
dedicated circuit.
OUTPUT: 18VAC
72VA

AC WIRING IS
SUPERVISED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE
TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:
ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

N.O
.

BLK

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP

BATTERY TABS

Connect to main PCB
header J3 using ribbon
cable (supplied)

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP

CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR
DELAY-SEC MODEL DELAY-SEC
(ZONE)

Data in

PROGRAMMABLE
AS TAMPER LOOP

Data out

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

PROGRAMMABLE
AS KEYSWITCH LOOP

N.C
.
S
P
PO ARE
WR AU
#1 X

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK
DETECTOR LOOP

¬.l
K0376 8/02

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2003:05:09 18:34:04Z
Modify Date                     : 2011:05:13 08:17:41-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:05:13 08:17:41-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : mfrankel
Title                           : K0376.pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:724a1576-6f51-4e67-90bb-ccf2de4ae118
Instance ID                     : uuid:a67ab1a4-0d76-4046-a0f9-e5ab9d2e78b3
Page Count                      : 144
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : mfrankel

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

K0376 Vista 128fbp V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation